Page 1 Distance Protection IED GR200 series (GRZ200) GRZ200--- S, G, and T positions TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION Notice: GRZ200 manual is issued for ‘031’ and ‘032’ software code, which you can identify at ’S, G, and T positions’ on Software nameplate.
Page 2 6F2S1915 (0.46) Safety Precautions Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully. This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood. Explanation of symbols used Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
Page 3 6F2S1915 (0.46) CAUTION •Earth The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed. CAUTION •Operating environment The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration. •Ratings Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.
Page 4 For further information in terms of the disposal, the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
Page 5 We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. •Copyright © Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2021. All rights reserved. •Registered Trademarks Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective...
Page 6 6F2S1915 (0.46) Contents Introduction ............................1 Protection functions ........................2 Purposes of the protection ..................... 2 1.1.1 Requirements in the protection functions ................2 1.1.2 Behavior of backup protections ..................... 4 1.1.3 Concepts of current differential protection (DIF) function ..........6 1.1.4 Concepts of distance protection (ZS/ZG) function ..............
Page 7 6F2S1915 (0.46) Permissive underreach protection (PUP) ................. 122 2.3.1 Permissive overreach protection (POP) ................123 2.3.2 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP) ................126 2.3.3 Blocking overreach protection (BOP) ................128 2.3.4 Protection for week infeed terminal ................. 131 2.3.5 Countermeasure for current reversal ................133 2.3.6 Carrier signal reception ....................
Page 8 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reset Ratio ......................... 201 2.7.4 Miscellaneous functions ....................201 2.7.5 Scheme logic ........................202 2.7.6 Setting ..........................204 2.7.7 Data ID ..........................209 2.7.8 Thermal overload function (THM) .................... 211 Thermal state determination .................... 212 2.8.1 Thermal characteristic ...................... 213 2.8.2 Scheme logic ........................
Page 9 6F2S1915 (0.46) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) ..............246 Drop-off and pickup setting....................247 2.13.1 Delay for the operation of the OVS element ..............247 2.13.2 Time characteristic ......................247 2.13.3 Miscellaneous functions ....................249 2.13.4 Scheme logic ........................250 2.13.5 Setting list .........................
Page 10 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic and setting ....................292 2.18.4 Setting ..........................294 2.18.5 Data ID ..........................295 2.18.6 Inrush current detection function (ICD) .................. 296 Operation and characteristic .................... 297 2.19.1 Scheme logic ........................297 2.19.2 Setting ..........................298 2.19.3 Data ID ..........................
Page 11 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminology ........................339 2.24.2 Function block diagram ..................... 344 2.24.3 Timing diagram ......................... 351 2.24.4 Autoreclosing logics ......................354 2.24.5 Setting ..........................371 2.24.6 Data ID ..........................373 2.24.7 Voltage check for autoreclose (VCHK) ..................378 VCHK1 for 1CB system ..................... 379 2.25.1 VCHK1 and VCHK2 for 1.5CB system ................
Page 12 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control hierarchy ........................436 Control level and control point ..................437 3.3.1 Selector switches and bay operations ................437 3.3.2 Programming of control-right distributions ..............437 3.3.3 Common controls (CMNCTRL) ....................439 Double command blocking (DCB) ..................440 3.4.1 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ...................
Page 13 6F2S1915 (0.46) Single position device function (SPOS) ..................497 Selection logic for SBO/DIR modes ................... 498 4.1.1 Cancel logic for SBO mode ....................513 4.1.2 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes..................517 4.1.3 Setup for BIO module ......................532 4.1.4 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication ................540 4.1.5 Setting ..........................
Page 14 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchronizing check for different network (SYNDIF) ............674 Relays to check line-outage ....................675 4.6.1 Synchronization check relays .................... 677 4.6.2 Line-outage check ......................683 4.6.3 Synchronization check ....................... 688 4.6.4 Relay selection for checking synchronization ..............692 4.6.5 Voltage selection for line arrangement ................
Page 15 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal ..........................871 4.10.4 Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ) ................. 873 Function setup ........................874 4.11.1 Preparation of the operation ..................... 875 4.11.2 Example of automatic sequence operation ............... 876 4.11.3 Control hierarchy conditions ..................... 878 4.11.4 Input for emergency stop ....................878 4.11.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication ................
Page 16 6F2S1915 (0.46) Human Machine Interface (HMI) .................... 961 Outlook ..........................961 5.6.1 LED Indicators ........................962 5.6.2 Function keys with LEDs ....................967 5.6.3 Monitoring jacks ........................ 972 5.6.4 Operation keys ........................974 5.6.5 Clock function ........................... 975 Clock setting ........................975 5.7.1 Selection of date and time formats ...................
Page 17 6F2S1915 (0.46) Trigger signals ......................... 1013 8.2.1 Trigger modes ........................1018 8.2.2 Screen information ......................1019 8.2.3 Setup for the event recorder ................... 1019 8.2.4 Setting ..........................1020 8.2.5 Signal (Data ID) ......................1020 8.2.6 Disturbance recorder ......................1021 Recording time and amount .................... 1021 8.3.1 Relays within disturbance recorder ................
Page 18 6F2S1915 (0.46) Max/Min/Averaged information about the peak-demand feature ......... 1056 9.5.1 Resetting data of peak-demand features ................ 1056 9.5.2 Statistics data (Counter group) ....................1057 Count information on the screen ..................1057 9.6.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature) ............... 1057 9.6.2 Statistics data (Accumulated time)..................
Page 19 6F2S1915 (0.46) Supervision of binary IO module#7 (BIO#7 error) ............. 1098 10.2.25 Supervision of binary IO module#8 (BIO#8 error) ............. 1099 10.2.26 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) ..........1100 10.2.27 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) ............. 1101 10.2.28 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)..........
Page 20 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for 61850 communications ................. 1189 11.3.4 Selection of a slave protocol ..................... 1191 11.3.5 How to supervise in 61850 communication ..............1191 11.3.6 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication ..............1192 11.3.7 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication ............1199 11.3.8 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option ................
Page 21 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scope of required test ......................1324 Cautions ..........................1325 Preparations ........................... 1325 Test operations ........................1327 Test for communication ....................1327 14.4.1 Test for relay application ....................1328 14.4.2 Test for control application ....................1330 14.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits ....................1330 14.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL) ...................
Page 22 6F2S1915 (0.46) Introduction Contents Page Page Abbreviation Control – Autoreclose (ARC) General control function – Backup protections – -Local and remote -Distance protection (ZS/ZG) -LED reset (LEDR) -Pilot schemes (DISCAR, DEFCAR) -Counter (GCNT) -Over current protection (OC) -Mode control (MDCTRL) -Earth fault protection (EF) Control and monitoring application –...
Page 23 6F2S1915 (0.46) GRL200 line differential protection has been designed to provide phase-segregated current differential protection with digital telecommunications, together with control applications. The GRL200—intelligent electronic device (IED)—provides the user with the flexibility to meet their application and engineering requirements in addition to offering excellent performance, the high quality and reliability.
Page 24 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 1.1-2(b) exemplifies that both the forward line and the busbar are protected using a CT. Once a fault occurs between the CT and the CB , the relay Ry for the forward line can operate, but the relay Ry for the busbar may fail to operate to clear the fault.
Page 25 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reliability (iii) The relay is in a quiescent state normally, but the relay shall respond to a fault instantly once it occurs on the power system. Hence, the operation availability shall be checked whenever the line is energized in unfaulted state. Additionally, to improve the operation reliability, the protection scheme is checked externally by fail-safe function (FS).
Page 26 6F2S1915 (0.46) Busbar G Busbar R Busbar H Zone2 Zone1 Line Trip command Tele communication Relay Relay Relay Relay Main (primary) Relay Backup (local) Delay timer Zone1 in Zone1 in ZS Zone1 in ZS ≥ & Zone2 in Zone2 in ZS Fail safe ( Backup (remote) Fail safe (FS)
Page 27 The DIF function in the GR200 series relay located at the ends of the line can examines the entering and outgoing currents in every 7.5 electrical degrees; they are transmitted to the other terminals in every four samples using the telecommunication.
Page 28 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z1S–Z5S in Mho characteristic with blinders Z4S-Mho.Reach Z1XS Z5S-R.Reach Z4S-R.Reach Z5S-R.Angle Z5S-Mho.Angle Z4S-R.Angle Figure 1.1-4 Six zones in Mho characteristic The reach of the zone1 element The user shall notice that the reach of the zone1 element is usually set to approximately 80 to 90% of the length of the line (the reach of the zone1 should not include the busbar at the remote end.
Page 29 GR200 series relay provides the block function for power swing (PSB) so that preventing unwanted tripping is possible during the power swing. Figure 1.1-5 illustrates the typical impedance locus as seen by the distance relay during the transient power swing.
Page 30 6F2S1915 (0.46) Distance protection characteristic (Mho) Impedance locus during transient power swing Load Area Figure 1.1-5 Impedance locus during transient power swing A special case of the power swing condition occurs when the power system disturbance is so severe that generators lose synchronism with each other and are said to be out-of-step. During an out-of-step condition the phase angle between generators continues to increase and pass through 180°, at which point a distance relay measures an impedance equal to that for a three phase fault at the center of the power system.
Page 31 Consequently, at each ends, the trip command can be issued faster. The GR200 series can provide the following carrier command schemes using the elements of the ZS/ZG function.
Page 32 6F2S1915 (0.46) Autoreclosing CB (ARC) after the operation of the protection functions 1.1.8 Most faults that occur on high voltage or extra-high voltage overhead lines are transient faults caused by lightning. Once a transient fault occurs, the circuit breaker (CB) is tripped to clear the fault;...
Page 33 6F2S1915 (0.46) [VCHK] Voltage check for auto-re-close function This function is used in corporation with the function of auto-re-close (ARC). The VCHK checks voltage and frequency differences between a Bus-bar and Lines, and permits the ARC the operation. Control The control functions are provided for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and transformers.
Page 34 Monitoring and metering functions Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Page 35 6F2S1915 (0.46) Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by this function using GR-TIEMS. Hardware overview The IED has human machine interface (HMI), which is made of LCD screen, indication lights, operation and function keys, monitoring jacks, and a USB connector. Voltage, current input terminals, and binary input and output circuits are provided on the rear..
Page 36 6F2S1915 (0.46) Symbols used in logical diagrams Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows: Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and Mapping point 1. Marked with : Relay elements 2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows: A binary output (BO) circuit A LED circuit...
Page 37 6F2S1915 (0.46) Timer symbol (ii) Delay timer  Delayed pick-up timer Fixed timer (XXX: Set time) Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range) XXX ─ YYY Delayed drop-off timer Fixed timer (XXX: Set time) Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range) XXX ─YYY One-shot timer ...
Page 38 6F2S1915 (0.46) Logic symbol (iii) AND gate  Output & Output OR gate  Output ≥1 Output XOR gate  Output Output Signal inversion  Output Output GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 17 -...
Page 39 6F2S1915 (0.46) Flip-flop symbol (iv) Output No change Output Scheme switch Switch Output Output Switch Output Output GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 18 -...
Page 40 Disconnecting Switch Earth Fault Earthing Switch Engineering Workstation in the substation Global Positioning System GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software Graphical User Interface Human Machine Interface Intelligent Electronic Device IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
Page 41 6F2S1915 (0.46) Abbreviation Description Coordinated Universal Time SyncSrc Synchronization Source Voltage Transformer Transformer module including VTs and CTs Selector device or selector switch GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 20 -...
Page 42 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) (i) Signal symbols Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for protections, controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits in hexadecimal;...
Page 43 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data Example Example Identifier texts Note length Function ID Element ID 3100001B6F 16-bits 400001 31 (First and second # of Element ID) 2200001B6F 32-bits 400001 22 (First and second # of Element ID) 3200001B6F 32-bits 400001 32 (First and second # of Element ID) 4200001B6F 32-bits 400001...
Page 44 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay application Contents Pages Pages Autoreclosing Fault locator (FL-Z) -Reclosing CB (ARC) Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) -Blocking reclose in CBF Inrush current detection(ICD) -Blocking reclose in ZS, ZG Overcurrent protection (OC) -Blocking reclose in OC Overcurrent protection in negative (OCN) 193 -Blocking reclose in EF Overvoltage protection (OV) -Blocking reclose in OCN...
Page 45 6F2S1915 (0.46) Distance protection (ZS/ZG) ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the IED ordering number;...
Page 46 6F2S1915 (0.46) Principle of distance measurement 2.1.1 Phase-to-phase fault The distance protection function used to detect phase-to-phase faults measures the impedance from the relay to the fault point using delta voltage and current. The positive-sequence impedance is used to represent the line impedance. Figure 2.1-1 provides an illustration of the power system for the condition of a phase-to- phase fault.
Page 47 6F2S1915 (0.46) �� − �� (2.1-6) �� − �� As shown above, the positive-sequence impedance is used when determining settings for phase faults. Figure 2.1-1 Phase-to-phase fault Single-phase-earth fault (ii) Figure 2.1-2 shows the power system in the event of a single-phase-earth fault. It is very difficult to measure precisely the distance to the fault point for a single-phase-earth fault.
Page 48 6F2S1915 (0.46) impedance and negative-sequence impedance are the same and that the influences of the fault resistance are ignored. (2.1-7) �� = �� × �� + �� (2.1-8) �� = �� × �� + �� (2.1-9) �� = �� ×...
Page 49 6F2S1915 (0.46) (2.1-14) �� = �� × �� ′ �� That is, the positive-sequence impedance Z up to the fault point can be obtained from the simple ratio of voltage V a to compensated current I a ' according to equation (2.1-14). Obtaining the compensated current according to equation (2.1-13) is called "zero- sequence compensation."...
Page 50 6F2S1915 (0.46) Equations in distance protection function 2.1.2 Element equations for Mho characteristic The element of the Mho characteristic is achieved by comparing the angle between S1 and S2 phases, which are obtained in Equations (2.1-15) and (2.1-16) . If the angle between the S1 and the S2 is greater than 90°, a fault is being detected in the element in the Mho characteristic;...
Page 51 6F2S1915 (0.46) where, Va = Voltage in phase-a V 0 = Voltage in zero-sequence Vbc = Voltage in phase-ab The dual-polarization can improve the directional security when applied to heavily loaded lines or weak infeed terminals. If a close-in fault in three-phase occurs, the polarizing voltage is memorized in the relay (i.e., memory action).
Page 52 6F2S1915 (0.46) I = fault current Zs = reach setting Vso = offset reach setting Offset Mho element S1=V–IZs S2=Vp –IZso S2=V+IZso Figure 2.1-6 Offset Mho characteristic on impedance plane Figure 2.1-6 illustrates a voltage diagram in the offset Mho characteristic; the angle comparison between the S1 and S2 phases are performed using Equations (2.1-19) and (2.1-20).
Page 53 6F2S1915 (0.46) horizontal characteristic is taken when no load current flowing; it is also taken when the θ1 angle is set to zero (0). The level element in the reactance characteristic is shown using Equation (2.1-21); the element in the gradual descent characteristic is shown in Equation (2.1-22): (2.1-21) X ≤...
Page 54 6F2S1915 (0.46) 2.1-8. The operating area (Figure 2.1-8.a) is enclosed with forward blinders (BFR and BFL lines); the BFL line is placed as the mirror image of the BFR line. Similarly, the operating area (Figure 2.1-8.b) is enclosed with the reverse blinders (BRR and BRL lines). BFL blinder BFR blinder θ...
Page 55 6F2S1915 (0.46) Quad element lagging θ Directional element Figure 2.1-9 Directional element For the element for the fault in phase-bc, the polarizing voltage (Vp bc ) is given using Equation (2.1-29): (2.1-29) = √3 × ( �� − �� ) ∠ − 90° + �� ...
Page 56 6F2S1915 (0.46) Offset directional element θ Quad element in reverse Figure 2.1-10 Offset element in Quad characteristic for close-in fault The element of the offset directional characteristic is obtained using Equation (2.1-31): (2.1-31) X + R tan �� ≤ �� ...
Page 57 6F2S1915 (0.46) Element characteristic in distance relay 2.1.3 The distance protection function has six measurement zones; it is possible to identify the fault point using these zones. This function has ZS elements to determine phase-to-phase faults and ZG elements to determine single-phase-earth faults. This distance protection function can be selected to have either a Mho characteristic (Mho) or a Quadrilateral characteristic (Quad) for both ZS and ZG.
Page 58 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. Z1S Mho element b. Z1G MHO element Z1S-Mho.Reach Z1G-Mho.Reach Z1G-Mho.Angle Z1S-Mho.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right) Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Figure 2.1-11 Z1S Mho element (Zone1 Mho element with Blinders) (i)-1-2 Mho with reactance characteristic Figure 2.1-12 (a) and (b) show Z1S MHO element and Z1G MHO element set with reactance X.
Page 59 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. Z1S MHO with reactance X b. Z1G MHO with reactance X Z1S-DX.Angle Z1G-DX.Angle Z1G-X.Reach Z1S-X.Reach ZSF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle2 ZSF-X.GrAngle2 Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1S-Mho.angle Z1G-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right) Figure 2.1-12 Zone1 MHO element set with reactance X in forward direction Quad characteristic...
Page 60 6F2S1915 (0.46) Number of zones The distance protection for phase-to-phase faults (ZS) includes six measuring zones and these are termed Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S and Z5S. The distance protection for single-phase-earth faults (ZG) also includes six measuring zones that are similarly termed Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G, Z3G, Z4G and Z5G.
Page 61 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z1S-DX.Angle Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-DR.Angle Z1S-Mho.Reach Figure 2.1-15 Z1S MHO element in reverse direction Z1S-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-X.Reach Z1S-DX.Angle Figure 2.1-16 Z1S MHO element set with reactance X in reverse direction Z1S-DR.Angle Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-DX.Angle...
Page 62 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z1S-Mho.Reach Z1S-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Reach Figure 2.1-18 Z1S MHO element non-directional† †Note: The tilted line, crossing the originate, instructs the function of the non-directional element. Z1S-X.Reach Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Reach Figure 2.1-19 Z1S Quad element non-directional Function and classification of 6 zones Table 2.1-2 provides a summary of the zones and characteristics for each element.
Page 63 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.1-2 Zone element, characteristics and directional Protection for Zone 1 (Relay /Z1G reach ≤ 80 % ) Z1XS Protection for Zone 1 extension Z1XG (Relay reach ≤ 100 %) Back up for Z1S, Z1X /Z2G Back up for Z1S, Z1X /Z3G Back up for Z1S, Z1X /Z4G...
Page 64 6F2S1915 (0.46) Special characteristic in ZS (ii) Overreach countermeasure If we consider ZS, when a phase-to-phase fault occurs, the setting of the ZS reactance element tends to be less than the fault impedance. For example, Figure 2.1-20 shows the relationship between the phase-to-phase impedances in a three-phase system when a phase-to-phase BC fault arises across Bus H.
Page 65 6F2S1915 (0.46) Offset characteristics in ZS Some elements in ZS are used for the detection of faults in the reverse direction and these elements can have an offset characteristic, which assures the detection of a close-up three- phase fault. Offset characteristic is provided in Z1S, Z1XS, and Z5S;...
Page 66 6F2S1915 (0.46) Offset Quadrilateral characteristic during close-up fault ZS-DirRθ(R abscissa) Static Quadrilateral characteristic Z1S-R ZS-Rθ ZS-DirXθ(X ordinate) Figure 2.1-22 Z1S Quad element close-up fault (Offset action) Operation of ZS for earth and multi-phase-faults ZS can operate for any of the following faults: a phase-to-phase fault, phase-to-phase ground fault, and a fault evolving into a multi-phase fault.
Page 67 6F2S1915 (0.46) In ZG, this function provides the compensation factors for all elements and these factors are defined with settings. For example, for Z1G, the settings [Z1G-Krs], [Z1G-Kxs], [Z1G-Krm], [Z1G-Kxm] are provided. Where, “s” refers to the protected line; the resistance “r”; the reactance “x”...
Page 68 6F2S1915 (0.46)  ( R R  X ) I Va = ( R ) Ia + ) + j ( X + j X + ( R + j X �� − �� (2.1-33) ) + ��...
Page 69 6F2S1915 (0.46) I 0 ’ I 1 , I 2 , I 0 Fault Figure 2.1-23 Earth fault compensation The Zero-sequence Current Compensation function (ZPCC) controls the zero-sequence compensation required as a consequence of the influence of the adjacent line in parallel line applications.
Page 70 6F2S1915 (0.46) In order for ZG not to operate against the multi-phase fault, it is possible for the user to set Block for setting [Z*G-MPFBlk]†. If this operation condition shall not be added in ZG operation, it is possible to set Non for the setting [Z*G-MPFBlk]. †Note: It is recommended to set [Z*G-MPFBlk]=Block for main protection elements, such as Zone 1, which need to operate instantaneously.
Page 71 6F2S1915 (0.46) Common application for ZS and ZG 2.1.4 Applications in ZS and ZG are divided into common features and special features. Each feature secures this distance protection function. Power swing block Operation of power swing block (PSB) Power swings occur when the output voltages of generators located at different points in the power system slip relative to one another because of system instabilities.
Page 72 6F2S1915 (0.46) The PSB operation is permitted when phase-overcurrent elements (OCCR) are operating. The thresholds of OCCR elements are defined with VCT rated current multiplied by 0.08 (i.e., secondary rated 1A×0.08 or 5A×0.08). PSBGOUT PSBSOUT PSBGZ PSBSZ PSBGIN PSBSIN PSBGZ PSBSZ b.
Page 73 6F2S1915 (0.46) PSBSOUT ZGF-X.GrAngle2 PSBSZ Z1G-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle PSBSIN Largest ZS Z1G-DR.Angle Z1G-DX.Angle Z1G-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Pivoted ZS PSBSZ PSB constructed with ZS and pivoted ZS Figure 2.1-26 PSB characteristic made with only forward ZSs The case of the Quad characteristic is similar to that of the Mho characteristic, as shown in Figure 2.1-27.
Page 74 6F2S1915 (0.46) the power swing remains within the shaded area of the rectangle between the outer and inner elements. A delayed pick-up timer, [TPSBS] is initiated when the locus passes through the PSBSOUT element and continues until the PSBSIN element operates in order to measure the time duration for the locus to pass through the shaded area.
Page 75 6F2S1915 (0.46) To VTF and CTF 8400081B63 & & ≥1 8500081B64 & 8100081B6F PSBG & PSBG-CVTF-BLK 8600081B65 & 8000081B66 & TPSBG 8100081B67 ≥1 8000081B70 PSBG & PSBG DET 8200081B68 From 0.02 to 0.100s DISTANCE COMMON & 8000001C20 OCCR-A & 8100001C21 OCCR-B &...
Page 76 6F2S1915 (0.46) are shown in Figure 2.1-30(b). LESL-Angle LEGL-Angle LESR-Angle LEGR-Angle LESR LEGR LESL LEGL LESL and LESR for ZS LEGL and LEGR for ZG Figure 2.1-30 Load encroachment characteristic The load encroachment element can operate for the command protection functions (ZCS and ZCG elements) when the user sets Block for the scheme switches [ZCS-LEBlk] and [ZCG- LEBlk].
Page 77 6F2S1915 (0.46) For Z1S and Z1G tripping, either instantaneous tripping or time delayed tripping can be selected; hence, the scheme switch [Z1CNT-INSTOP] is provided for the selection of the trip mode, which is described later. Autoreclose initiation blocking If ZS and ZG detect a fault, the output signals of ZS and ZG are generated in trip circuit (TRC) and the CB is tripped.
Page 78 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000001BB0 Z1CNT_MPROT 8000001B62 Z1CNT-TPBLK & Z1CNT-TPBlk 8100001B63 Z1CNT-3PTP & Z1CNT-3PTP 8200001B64 Z1CNT-ARCBLK & Z1CNT-ARCBlk 8300001B65 Z1CNT-INSTOP & Z1CNT-INSTOP Figure 2.1-31 Scheme logic of Zone1 operation control GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 57 -...
Page 79 6F2S1915 (0.46) Extended application 2.1.5 Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) If a dead line has a fault prior to energization the CB should trip quickly upon when the line is energized. To trip the CB when the faulted line is energized, a switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection function is provided.
Page 80 6F2S1915 (0.46) Enhances in Z1G, Z1XG & Z5G zones The Z1G, Z1XG, and Z5G zones are normally applied for instantaneous tripping; they can have their own, dedicated ‘Covering zones’. The user can program the reactance reaches using settings [Z1G-CovCoeff], [Z1XG-CovCoeff] and [Z5G-CovCoeff] in the associated operating zone reach.
Page 81 6F2S1915 (0.46) Calculation in Z*G-CovCoeff The user can get the recommended setting value of [Z1G-CovCoeff] by the following equations. First, the recommended setting value can be expressed by Equation (2.1-36). Compensated 'setting [Z1G-X.Reach]' (2.1-36) Setting [Z1G-CovCoeff] = Margin × Setting [ Z1G-X.Reach ] In this equation, the compensated ‘setting[Z1G-X.Reach]’...
Page 82 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay application: Distance carrier instruction of this function separately. (See Chapter command protection For the operation, the user should set On for the scheme switches [ZCS-EN] and [ZCG- EN], respectively. ZS command protection Figure 2.1-33 and Figure 2.1-34 show the ZS characteristic of the command protection. You can find the Mho or the Quad characteristic;...
Page 83 6F2S1915 (0.46) You also should place a set of a set of Block for setting [ZCSR-VTFBlk] because the operation of the ZCSR should stop when the VTF is detected. Conversely, you should place a set of Non for the setting were you to require the ZCSR operation keeping in the VTF detection. Make sure that the ZCSF does not supply the offset feature while the ZCSR supplies the offset feature.
Page 84 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCSF-DX.Angle ZCSF-X.Reach ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSR-DR.Angle ZCSF-R.Reach ZCSR-R.Reach ZCSF-R.Reach ZCSR-R.Angle ZCSF-DR.Angle ZCSR-X.Reach ZCSR-R.Angle Figure 2.1-34 ZCSF and ZCSR in Quad characteristic ZG command protection (ii) With respect to the ZCGF and the ZCGR both, these characteristics and functions are similar to the ZCSF and the ZCSR.
Page 85 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCGF-Mho.Angle ZCGF-Mho.Reach ZCGF-R.Angle ZCGF-R.Angle ZCGF-X.Reach ZCGR-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Reach ZCGF-R.Reach ZCGF-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Angle ZCGR-R.Angle ZCGR-X.Reach ZCGR-Mho.Reach ZCGR-Mho.Angle Figure 2.1-35 ZCGF and ZCGR in Mho characteristic ZCGF-DX.Angle ZCGF-X.Reach ZCGF-R.Angle ZCGB-DR.Angle ZCGF-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Angle ZCGF-DR.Angle ZCGR-DX.Angle ZCGR-X.Reach Figure 2.1-36 ZCGF and ZCGR in Quad characteristic GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 86 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.1.7 ZS logic Figure 2.1-37 shows the ZS logic and corresponding SOTF logics. Z1S element & Zab ≤ Z1S ≥1 Zbc ≤ Z1S & ≥1 Zca ≤ Z1S 8300011B63 Checking ≥1 particular reach & TZ1S ≥1 ZminF-AB ≥1 ≥1...
Page 87 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z1XS element & Zab ≤ Z1XS ≥1 Zbc ≤ Z1XS & ≥1 Zca ≤ Z1XS 8700011B63 Checking ≥1 particular reach From Z1S & TZ1XS ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8400011C20 Z1XS-AB ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check 8100061B23 & To Grouping logic &...
Page 88 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z2S element & Zab ≤ Z2S ≥1 Zbc ≤ Z2S & ≥1 Zca ≤ Z2S 8300021B63 Checking ≥1 particular reach From Z1S & TZ2S ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8000021C20 Z2S-AB ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check 8200021B23 & To Grouping logic &...
Page 89 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z3S element Zab ≤ Z3S Zbc ≤ Z3S Zca ≤ Z3S 8700021B63 ≥1 TZ3S ≥1 ≥1 8400031C20 Z3S-AB 8300031B23 & To Grouping logic & & 8500031C21 Z3S-BC Z3S-OPT & ≥1 & & 8600031C22 Z3S-CA & & & ≥1 NonDir 0.00-100.00s 8400031B66...
Page 90 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z4S element Zab ≤ Z4S Zbc ≤ Z4S Zca ≤ Z4S 8B00041B63 ≥1 TZ4S ≥1 ≥1 8800041C20 Z4S-AB 8400041B23 & To Grouping logic & & 8900041C21 Z4S-BC Z4S-OPT & ≥1 & & 8A00041C22 Z4S-CA & & & ≥1 NonDir 0.00-100.00s 8800041B66...
Page 91 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z5S element & Zab ≤ Z5S ≥1 Zbc ≤ Z5S & ≥1 Zca ≤ Z5S 8B00051B63 Checking ≥1 particular reach From Z1S & TZ5S ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8800051C20 Z5S-AB ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check 8100061B23 & To Grouping logic &...
Page 92 6F2S1915 (0.46) The Z1S element generates a trip signal for the trip function (TRC) immediately when the instantaneous mode is selected using the scheme switch [Z1CNT_INSTOP]. Note that the scheme switch [LES_EN] can be used to block the Z1S element. The scheme switches [Z1S- PSBBLK] and [Z1G-PSBBLK] can be used to block CB tripping when a power swing occurs in the system.
Page 93 6F2S1915 (0.46) To TRC From Z1S to Z5S logics 8300001B28 To DISCAR SOTF-Z1S-OPT ≥1 SOTF-ZS-OPT-TRIP SOTF-Z1XS-OPT SOTF-Z2S-OPT SOTF-Z3S-OPT SOTF-Z4S-OPT SOTF-Z5S-OPT SOTF-ZS-ARC-BLOCK 8C00001B66 ≥1 SOTF-ZS-OPT-ABR SOTF-Z1S-OPT-AB 8D00001B67 SOTF-Z1S-OPT-BC SOTF-ZS-OPT-BCR 8E00001B68 SOTF-Z1S-OPT-CA SOTF-ZS-OPT-CAR SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-AB SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-BC ≥1 SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-CA SOTF-Z2S-OPT-AB SOTF-Z2S-OPT-BC SOTF-Z2S-OPT-CA SOTF-Z3S-OPT-AB ≥1 SOTF-Z3S-OPT-BC SOTF-Z3S-OPT-CA SOTF-Z4S-OPT-AB...
Page 94 6F2S1915 (0.46) 800001EBB2 Z1G_3PTP 8300011B63 ≥1 ≥1 TZ1G 8000011C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8000011B69 & & & 8100011C21 Z1G-OPT ≥1 & & & 8200011C22 & & & ≥1 ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8000011B66 & & ≥1 & Z1G-OPT-A ≥1 8100011B67 ≥1 Z1GCOV &...
Page 95 6F2S1915 (0.46) 810006EBB2 Z1XG_3PTP 8700011B63 ≥1 TZ1XG ≥1 8400061C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8100061B69 & & & Z1XG 8500061C21 Z1XG-OPT ≥1 & & & 8600061C22 & & & ≥1 ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8400011B20 & & ≥1 & Z1XG-OPT-A ≥1 8500011B21 ≥1 Z1XGCOV &...
Page 96 6F2S1915 (0.46) 820002EBB2 Z2G_3PTP 8300011B63 ≥1 TZ2G ≥1 8000021C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8200021B69 & & & 8100021C21 Z2G-OPT ≥1 & & & 8200021C22 & & & ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8000021B60 Z2G-MPFBlk & & Z2G-OPT-A ≥1 8100021B67 & Z2G-LPBlk & NonDir Z2G-OPT-B 8200021B68 &...
Page 97 6F2S1915 (0.46) 830003EBB2 Z3G_3PTP 8700031B63 ≥1 TZ3G ≥1 8400031C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8300021B69 & & & 8500031C21 Z3G-OPT ≥1 & & & 8600031C22 & & & ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8400031B66 Z3G-MPFBlk & & Z3G-OPT-A ≥1 8500031B67 & Z3G-LPBlk & NonDir Z3G-OPT-B 8600031B68 &...
Page 98 6F2S1915 (0.46) 840004EBB2 Z4G_3PTP 8B00041B63 ≥1 TZ4G ≥1 8400031C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8400041B69 & & & 8500031C21 Z4G-OPT ≥1 & & & 8600031C22 & & & ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8800041B66 Z4G-MPFBlk & & Z4G-OPT-A ≥1 8800041B67 & Z4G-LPBlk & NonDir Z4G-OPT-B 8800041B68 &...
Page 99 6F2S1915 (0.46) 850005EBB2 Z1XG_3PTP 8800051B63 ≥1 TZ5G ≥1 8800051C20 ≥1 To Grouping logic 8100061B69 & & & 8900051C21 Z5G-OPT ≥1 & & & 8A00051C22 & & & ≥1 ≥1 0.00-100.00s 8800051B20 & & ≥1 & Z5G-OPT-A ≥1 8900051B21 ≥1 Z5GCOV &...
Page 100: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) Instantaneous and blocking TRIP commands The Z*G element is able to operate in an instantaneous mode by using the scheme switch [Z1CNT_INSTOP]. Furthermore, the scheme switch [LEG_EN] can block this element. The scheme switch [Z*G-PSBBLK] is selected for blocking the tripping when a power swing occurs in the system.
Page 101 6F2S1915 (0.46) To TRC From Z1G to Z5G logics To DISCAR 8300001B28 SOTF-Z1G-OPT ≥1 SOTF-ZG-OPT-TRIP SOTF-Z1XG-OPT SOTF-Z2G-OPT SOTF-Z3G-OPT SOTF-Z4G-OPT SOTF-Z5G-OPT SOTF-ZG-ARC-BLOCK 8800001B81 ≥1 SOTF-ZG-OPT-AR SOTF-Z1G-OPT-A 8900001B82 SOTF-Z1G-OPT-B SOTF-ZG-OPT-BR 8A00001B83 SOTF-Z1G-OPT-C SOTF-ZG-OPT-CR SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-A SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-B ≥1 SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-C SOTF-Z2G-OPT-A SOTF-Z2G-OPT-B SOTF-Z2G-OPT-C SOTF-Z3G-OPT-A ≥1 SOTF-Z3G-OPT-B SOTF-Z3G-OPT-C SOTF-Z4G-OPT-A...
Page 102 6F2S1915 (0.46) Tips to set the main/remote backup relays 2.1.8 To make the coordination between the main (primary) relay and backup relays on lines, using a reach setting and a delay timer setting can resolve the problems. Figure 2.1-53 exemplifies that respective reaches and delays in the distance protection (ZS/ZG) functions result in the coordination between the main (primary) relay and backup relays on the lines.
Page 103: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) operate instantly. As shown in Figure 2.1-53, the reach of the zone1 is required to cover the majority of the line length AB, whereas the zone1 should be independent on faults that occur beyond the busbar B. Given the existence of the measuring errors in the VT and the CT, approximate 80 to 90% of the line AB is required to set for the reach setting at the zone1 When the ZS/ZG function is used in the main relay, zero should be set for the both settings [TZ*S] in order that tripping is executed instantly.
Page 104 6F2S1915 (0.46) Busbar A Busbar B Busbar C Line AB Line BC Zone3 Zone2 Zone2 Zone1 Zone1 Reach Figure 2.1-54 Setting zone2 when line BC is shorter than line AB Tips: For the reach and delay settings about the CTI to the zone 2, the user is generally required to check the selectivity that is influenced with the slowest timer of the following protection relays: (1) Busbar, transformer, and breaker-failure relays at the remote end and (2) line protection relay on the adjacent lines.
Page 105: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) by using only the reach settings, the user may be required to set the TZ3 longer than the Setting for backward lines (Zones4 and 5 serviced as backup relays) (iv) If backward adjacent lines are required to protect by the relay , the zone4 or the zone5 suitable to protect.
Page 106 6F2S1915 (0.46) Command distance protection Relay application: ‡Note: For more information about the ARC function, see chapter Autoreclosing function §Note: For the transient fault, the power transmission could be recovered transiently by the operation of the ARC function, whereas the zone1X cannot operate effectively for the permanent fault (i.e., more of the network will be lost than necessary).
Page 107 6F2S1915 (0.46) underreach setting in enough to the zone1 Busbar A Busbar B Line BJ Line AJ Fault Line CJ Zone1(S) Busbar C TZR1 Figure 2.1-58 Line CJ tapped at junction J Setting for the primary zone (Zone1 and a shot tapped line) (iii) Suppose the busbar C is tapped at the junction J on the line AB, as shown in Figure 2.1-59.
Page 108 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS/ZG test 2.1.10 ZS-Test.CTRL When the user wishes to have the relay characteristic test without the influence of the Zmin feature, On should be set for the setting [ZS-Test.CTRL] not to operate the Zmin feature. ZS-Offset.CTRL (ii) As shown in Figure 2.1-60, if the offset characteristic is required during the test regardless of the fault occurrences, the user should set Offset for the setting [ZS-Offset.CTRL].
Page 109 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.1.11 Distance common(Function ID: 432001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating 0.00 - 0.00 - Charging current compensation for ZG and ZS Z-IcC 0.00 0.00 1.00 5.00 Z-Vn 100 - 120 V Rated voltage for ZG and ZS Charging current compensation use or not for Z-IcC.EN Off / On...
Page 110 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z1S-EN Off / On - Z1S protection enable Z2S-EN Off / On - Z2S protection enable Z3S-EN Off / On - Z3S protection enable Z4S-EN Off / On - Z4S protection enable...
Page 111 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Output Multi-phase or non-earth-fault condition is Z1S-MSDET Off / On used or not Z1S-PSBBlk Non / Block - Z1S operation blocked or not by PSB detection Block Z1S-LEBlk Non / Block...
Page 112 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z3S- Z3S directional-X characteristic use or not (for Off / On MhoDX.EN Mho) Z3S-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg Z3S directional-X characteristic angle Quad 0.10 - 0.01 - Z3S-X.Reach...
Page 113 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Forward / Reverse / Z5S-Dir - Z5S directional characteristic Reverse NonDir Z5S-Mho.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z5S mho characteristic angle (for Mho) 0.10 - 0.01 - Z5S-Mho.Reach - Z5S mho reach (for Mho)
Page 114 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z1XS- Off / On - Z1XS resistive reach use or not (for Mho) MhoR.EN Z1XS-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z1XS resistive reach characteristic angle 0.10 - 0.01 - Z1XS-R.Reach...
Page 115 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ZCS-EN Off / On - ZCS scheme swtich Comm. ZCS-LEBlk Non / Block - ZCS LE block switch ZCSF Mho ZCSF- 30 - 90 deg ZCSF mho characteristic angle (for Mho) Mho.Angle ZCSF-...
Page 116 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCS (Function ID： 430001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating 0.10 - 0.01 - ZCSR-R.Reach - ZCSR resistive reach 25.50 5.10 500.00 100.00 ZCSR- 0 - 60 deg ZCSR directional-X characteristic angle DX.Angle ZCSR- ZCSR directional-R characteristic angle (for 0 - 60...
Page 117 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z1G-EN Off / On - Z1G protection enable Z2G-EN Off / On - Z2G protection enable Z3G-EN Off / On - Z3G protection enable Z4G-EN Off / On - Z4G protection enable...
Page 118 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Zero phase current factor, Adjacent line Z1G-Krm 0 - 1000 R0m/R1 Zero phase current factor, Adjacent line Z1G-Kxm 0 - 1000 X0m/X1 TZ1G 0.00 - 100.00 s Z1G operation delay time 0.00...
Page 119 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z2G-LPBlk Non / Block - Z2G leading phase operation block Z2G trip mode, phase segregated trip or 3- Z2G-TPMD 1P / 3P phase trip Z2G-ARCBlk Non / Block - Autoreclose execution block by Z2G-trip...
Page 120 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z4G- 0.10 - 0.01 - - Z4G mho reach (for Mho) 20.00 4.00 Mho.Reach 500.00 100.00 Z4G-MhoX.EN Off / On - Z4G reactance reach use or not (for Mho) 0.10 - 0.01 - Z4G-X.Reach...
Page 121 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z5G-DX.Angle 0 - 60 deg Z5G directional-X characteristic angle Quad 0.10 - 0.01 - Z5G-X.Reach - Z5G reactance reach 10.00 2.00 500.00 100.00 Z5G- Off / On-Set / On- - ZG gradient characteristic...
Page 122 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Z1XG- Off / On-Set / On- - ZG gradient characteristic X.GrAngleEN Adapt Z1XG-R.Angle 30 - 90 deg Z1XG resistive reach characteristic angle 0.10 - 0.01 - Z1XG-R.Reach - Z1XG resistive reach...
Page 123 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ZCG-EN Off / On - ZCG scheme switch ZCG- Commo ZCG-LEBlk Non / Block - Load encroachment enable ZCGF Mho ZCGF- 30 - 90 deg ZCGF mho characteristic angle (for Mho) Mho.Angle ZCGF-...
Page 124 6F2S1915 (0.46) ZCG (Function ID： 431001） Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ZCGR- 0 - 60 deg ZCGR directional-X characteristic angle DX.Angle Quad 0.10 - 0.01 - ZCGR-X.Reach - ZCGR reactance reach 40.00 8.00 500.00 100.00 ZCGR-R.Angle 30 - 90...
Page 125 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.1.12 Signal monitoring point  ZS ZG Common (Function ID: 432001) Element ID Name Description 8300001C27 Earth fault relay element operated 8000001C20 OCCR-A OCCR relay element operated(phase-A) 8100001C21 OCCR-B OCCR relay element operated(phase-B) 8200001C22 OCCR-C OCCR relay element operated(phase-C) 8100001B63 Z1CNT-3PTP Z1 control command (3-phase trip)
Page 126 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 8500031C25 OCF3S-BC OCF2S relay element operated (phase-BC) 8600031C26 OCF3S-CA OCF2S relay element operated (phase-CA) 8400041B64 OCF4S OP OCF2S operated 8800041C24 OCF4S-AB OCF2S relay element operated (phase-AB) 8900041C25 OCF4S-BC OCF2S relay element operated (phase-BC)
Page 127 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 8500051BB3 SOTF-Z5S BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z5S 8800051B6A SOTF-Z5S-OPT-AB SOTF operated for Z5S (phase-AB) 8900051B6B SOTF-Z5S-OPT-BC SOTF operated for Z5S (phase-BC) 8A00051B6C SOTF-Z5S-OPT-CA SOTF operated for Z5S (phase-CA) 8500051B2B SOTF-Z5S-TRIP SOTF operated for Z5S (3-phases OR)
Page 128 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 8100021C21 Z2S-BC Z2S relay element operated (phase-BC) 8100021B61 Z2S-BCX Z2S-BCX operated (phase-BC) 8200021C22 Z2S-CA Z2S relay element operated (phase-CA) 8200021B62 Z2S-CAX Z2S-CAX operated (phase-CA) 8200021B23 Z2S-OPT Z2S operated (3-phases OR) 8000021B66 Z2S-OPT-AB...
Page 129 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 8B00041B65 Z4S_ORX OP Z4S operated before timer (3-phases OR) 8800051C20 Z5S-AB Z5S relay element operated (phase-AB) 8800051B60 Z5S-ABX Z5S-ABX operated (phase-AB) 8500051B69 Z5S-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block by Z5S protection 8900051C21 Z5S-BC Z5S relay element operated (phase-BC)
Page 130 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point on PLC logic  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 810006EBB2 Z1XS_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1XS 810006EBB1 Z1XS_INST_OP Z1XS instantaneously operated 820002EBB0 Z2STP_BLOCK Z2S trip block signal 820002EBB2 Z2S_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z2S 820002EBB1 Z2S_INST_OP Z2S instantaneously operated...
Page 131 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8400031C24 OCF3G-A OCF3G relay element operated (phase-A) 8500031C25 OCF3G-B OCF3G relay element operated (phase-B) 8600031C26 OCF3G-C OCF3G relay element operated (phase-C) 8400041B64 OCF4G OP OCF4G operated 8800041C24 OCF4G-A OCF4G relay element operated (phase-A)
Page 132 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8A00041B6D SOTF-Z4G-OPT-C SOTF operated for Z4G (phase-C) 8400041B2B SOTF-Z4G-TRIP SOTF operated for Z4G (3-phases OR) 8500051BB4 SOTF-Z5G BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z5G 8800051B6B SOTF-Z5G-OPT-A SOTF operated for Z5G (phase-A) 8900051B6C SOTF-Z5G-OPT-B SOTF operated for Z5G (phase-B)
Page 133 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8500071B67 Z1XG-COV-B Z1XG COV relay element operated (phase-B) 8600071B68 Z1XG-COV-C Z1XG COV relay element operated (phase-C) 8600061B62 Z1XG-CX Z1XG-CX operated (phase-C) 8100061B69 Z1XG-OPT Z1XG operated (3-phases OR) 8400061B66 Z1XG-OPT-A Z1XG operated (phase-A)
Page 134 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8600031B62 Z3G-CX Z3G-CX operated (phase-C) 8300031B69 Z3G-OPT Z3G operated (3-phases OR) 8400031B66 Z3G-OPT-A Z3G operated (phase-A) 8500031B67 Z3G-OPT-B Z3G operated (phase-B) 8600031B68 Z3G-OPT-C Z3G operated (phase-C) 8700031B63 Z3G-ORX Z3G-ORX operated (3-phases OR)
Page 135 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8500051B69 Z5G-OPT Z5G operated (3-phases OR) 8800051B66 Z5G-OPT-A Z5G operated (phase-A) 8900051B67 Z5G-OPT-B Z5G operated (phase-B) 8A00051B68 Z5G-OPT-C Z5G operated (phase-C) 8B00051B63 Z5G-ORX Z5G-ORX operated (3-phases OR) 8B00051B65 Z5G-ORX OP Z5G operated before timer (3-phases OR)
Page 136 6F2S1915 (0.46)  Connection point on PLC logic ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 840004EBB4 SOTF-Z4G BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z4G 850005EBB4 SOTF-Z5G BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z5G 800001EBB0 Z1GTP_BLOCK Z1G trip block signal 800001EBB2 Z1G_3PTP Z1G trip (3-phases) 800001EBB3 Z1G_ARCBLOCK...
Page 137 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ZS (Function ID: 430001) Element ID Name Description 8600071B6B ZCSR-CA ZCSR protection operated (phase-CA) 8600071B6E ZCSR-CAX ZCSR operated (phase-CA) Signal monitoring point  ZG (Function ID: 431001) Element ID Name Description 8000071B75 ZCGF-A ZCGF relay element operated (phase-A) 8000071B8C ZCGF-AX ZCGF operated (phase-A)
Page 138 6F2S1915 (0.46) Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC) The switch-onto-fault function (SOTF-OC) is used to detect and rapidly clear faults when circuit breakers (CBs) are closed onto a pre-existing fault in the protected zone. If a circuit breaker is closed onto a permanent fault, the memory circuit in the IED will be unable to memorize the voltage data required to retain the pre-fault values.
Page 139 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.2.1 The SOTF-OC function provides signals to the TRC function: SOTFOC-OPT-A,-B,-C, SOTFOC- TRIP, and SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK. The SOTF-OC function issues a trip signal upon the operation of the OCSOTF element if CBs are closed onto a fault when energizing a transmission line following a period of non-operation.
Page 140 6F2S1915 (0.46) To DISCAR 800000EBB1 OC-RTP.EN OC-RETRIP & From ARC To TRC 8300001B23 SHOT_MULTI SOTFOC-TRIP ≥1 8000001B60 ≥1 SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 8000011C20 & 8800011B62 & 8100011C21 & SOTFOC-OPT-A OCSOTF & & 8900011B63 8200011C22 & SOTFOC-OPT-B & & 8A00011B64 & SOTFOC-OPT-C From ICD ICD-A &...
Page 141 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.2.2 SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable 0.02 - 0.10 - OCSOTF A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 6.00 3.00 15.00 Non / Block-3P / OCSOTF-2fBlk...
Page 142 6F2S1915 (0.46) Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR) When every IED can exchange operational information mutually using communication system, accurate decision of whether or not a fault is internal on the line can be made. Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR) can provide such protection using the distance protection (ZS/ZG).
Page 143 6F2S1915 (0.46) Permissive underreach protection (PUP) 2.3.1 Application When an underreach element operates at local terminal, and when the circuit breaker (CB) is tripped by this element, a trip permission signal† is sent to other opposite terminals. When the opposite terminals receive the signal, CBs at these terminals are tripped instantly if an overreaching element at respective these terminals has been operated.
Page 144: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) To carrier From Z1S/Z1G in local Terminal send circuit Z1G-AX OP DISCAR-CS-A_PUP Z1G-BX OP DISCAR-CS-B_PUP Z1G-CX OP DISCAR-CS-C_PUP DISCAR-CS-S_PUP Z1S-ABX OP ≥1 Z1S-BCX OP 8000001B73 Z1S-CAX OP DISCAR-OPT-A 8100001B74 DISCAR-OPT-B 8200001B75 DISCAR-OPT-C 8300001B76 DISCAR-OPT-S From ZG in local Terminal 8000001B68 8000001B20 ZCGF-AX...
Page 145 6F2S1915 (0.46) terminal, the CB at the terminal is tripped in permission overreach protection (POP). In other words, POP can determine if the fault exists inside the protected line based on the overlapping operation of the forward overreaching elements at both terminals. ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used for the forward overreaching element.
Page 146: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) terminals when any of the following conditions are satisfied: The forward overreaching element operates; and CRL has not observed the current reversal. When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], CB is opened; and a trip permission signal (DISCAR-CS-*) is received from the other terminal. When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], the forward overreaching element (ZCSF/ZCGF) and the reverse looking element (ZCSR/ZCGR) have not operated;...
Page 147: Figure
6F2S1915 (0.46) Delay of trip permission signal (vi) Figure 2.3-4 shows POP sending circuit. The trip permission signals are (DISCAR-S: used for the external carrier communication) and (INT.DISCAR-S-*: used for the integral carrier communication). The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
Page 148 6F2S1915 (0.46) through the transmission line because that the transmission line includes a fault; the fault may reduce the power of the signal and then PUP and POP may fail to operate. Unblocking overreach protection (UOP) is introduced in order to negate this issue. We can regard a transmitted signal as a trip block signal;...
Page 149 6F2S1915 (0.46) is not received from the other terminals. When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], both the forward overreaching  element and the reverse looking element are not operating and a trip block signal is not received from the other terminals. The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
Page 150 6F2S1915 (0.46) terminal exists; therefore, ECHO is not required in BOP. WIKT is not applicable in BOP; hence, the weak infeed terminal cannot operate. Countermeasure of current reversal (CRL) BOP has the countermeasure of current reversal, as well as PUP. (For more information of CRL, see section 2.3.6) Scheme logic (ii)
Page 151 6F2S1915 (0.46) To carrier send circuit DISCAR-CS-A_BOP DISCAR-CS-B_BOP DISCAR-CS-C_BOP DISCAR-CS-S_BOP 8000001B73 DISCAR-OPT-A 8100001B74 DISCAR-OPT-B From ZS and ZG 8200001B75 DISCAR-OPT-C TCHD-Dis 8300001B76 DISCAR-OPT- 8000001B68 ZCGF-AX & & ≥1 8000001B20 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A ≥1 & ≥1 ZCGF-BX & 8100001B21 8200001B6A ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B ≥1...
Page 152 6F2S1915 (0.46) TSCT-Dis DISCAR-OPT-A & 8000001B78 ≥1 & INT.DISCAR-S-A DISCAR-OPT-B & ≥1 8100001B79 & INT.DISCAR-S-B DISCAR-OPT-C used for the & 8200001B7A ≥1 integral carrier communication INT.DISCAR-S-C & 8300001B7B & ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-S & From Z1G 0.00 to 1.00s Z1G-TRIP-A ≥1 Z1G-TRIP-B Z1G-TRIP-C Z1S-OPT 8F00001B7C...
Page 153 6F2S1915 (0.46) healthy state, the echo signal is restricted to last for 200 ms by delayed pickup timer T2. Figure 2.3-7 and Figure 2.3-8 shows ECHO logic. Users can enable ECHO operation using scheme switch [Dis-ECHO] by setting it to Off. From ZS and ZG ZCGF-AX ≥1...
Page 154 6F2S1915 (0.46) Undervoltage elements (UVLS or UVLG) being operated.  Neither forward overreaching element nor reverse looking element being operated.  From PROT COMMON UVLG-A & WKIT-A_CONDITION ≥1 UVLG-B WKIT-B_CONDITION ≥1 & UVLG-C ≥1 WKIT-C_CONDITION & ≥1 ≥1 UVLS-AB UVLS-BC TWICOORD UVLS-CA &...
Page 155 6F2S1915 (0.46) reversal may be found when an external looped circuit exists if not for parallel lines. :Fault current flow before CB A1 being opened :Fault current flow after CB A1 being opened (a) Direction of fault current Forward looking element Reverse looking element TREBK setting Forward looking element...
Page 156 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure shows CRL logic. CRL logic can determine the current reversal when the reverse looking element runs and the forward looking element does not run. If the current reversal is found, CRL declares for the opposite terminal to block the trip operation immediately. At the same time, CRL blocks CB tripping at its own terminal.
Page 157 6F2S1915 (0.46) carrier communication, the carrier signal received by the binary input is connected to PLC connection point (DISCAR-R1). As a result, (External DISCAR-R1) signal will be generated. In addition, DISCAR has the scheme switch [DisCAR-CHSEL]. By this setting, (External DISCAR-R1) signal generation is as follows.
Page 158 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.3.8 CARCOM(Function ID: 438001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating CAR-CHNUM 2-TERM / 3-TERM - Carrier scheme terminal number 2-TERM TCARECCB 0.00 - 200.00 s Echo enable timer from CB opened 0.10 TWICOORD 0.000 - 0.100 s Time coordination for UV relay operation...
Page 159 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.3.9 Signal monitoring point  CARRIER_COMMON (Function ID: 438001) Element ID Name Description 8000001BB0 CAR_BLOCK Carrier block signal 8000001B67 CH1-USE Channel 1 use 8100001B68 CH2-USE Channel 2 use 8400001B64 ECH01_CONDITION Echo1 condition 8500001B65 ECH02_CONDITION Echo2 condition 8000001B61 WKIT-A_CONDITION Weak infeed trip A phase condition...
Page 160 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  DISCAR(Function ID: 436001) Element ID Name Description 8100001B21 DISCAR-TRIP-B Distance carrier trip signal(phase-B) 8200001B22 DISCAR-TRIP-C Distance carrier trip signal(phase-C) 8100001B77 DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK Distance carrier ARC block signal 8000001B78 INT.DISCAR-S-A Distance carrier send (for integral carrier) 8100001B79 INT.DISCAR-S-B Distance carrier send (for integral carrier)
Page 161 6F2S1915 (0.46) Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) Directional earth fault command protection (DEFCAR) provides POP, UOP and BOP techniques† using two elements of earth fault protection between in forward and in reverse (DEFCF and DEFCR‡). POP, UOP and BOP can issue either a single-pole trip (1P) or three- phase trip (3P).
Page 162 6F2S1915 (0.46) Permissive overreach protection (POP) 2.4.1 DEFCAR sends a trip permission signal in POP; and POP does not send a trip permission signal for non-internal fault. Figure 2.4-1 shows POP scheme logic. The elements of OCD are used to select a phase which should be tripped in CB. When POP receives a trip permission signal, POP issues a trip signal on condition that DEFCF has operated.
Page 163 6F2S1915 (0.46) To CRL 8400001B68 TDEFCB From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X DEFCR & 0.00 to 0.30s 8300001B67 ≥1 DEFCF-X From VTF ≥1 To carrier send circuit VTF_DETECT From PROT COMMON DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP CB_LOSS_PHASE DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP 8000001B74 & DEFCAR-OPT-AR 8100001B75 & DEFCAR-OPT-BR 8200001B76 &...
Page 164 6F2S1915 (0.46) TREBK-DEF 8000001B69 DEFCF-X & DEF-REVBLK ≥1 0.02s 0.00 —10.00s DEFCR-X Figure 2.4-3 Current reversal logic From PROT COMMON UVLG-A & WKIT-A_CONDITION ≥1 UVLG-B WKIT-B_CONDITION ≥1 & UVLG-C ≥1 WKIT-C_CONDITION & ≥1 ≥1 UVLS-AB UVLS-BC TWICOORD UVLS-CA & DEAL_LINE_DEDTECT 0.000 to 0.100 s Figure 2.4-4 UVL for WKIT operation TDEFC...
Page 165 6F2S1915 (0.46) Permission signals received: 8000001B6E & From Terminal 1 DEF-ECHO_CS-A ≥1 Integral DEFCAR-R1-A ≥1 & ≥1 Integral DEFCAR-R1-B 0.05s 0.2s ≥1 & ≥1 8100001BE Integral DEFCAR-R1-C & DEF-ECHO_CS-B ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 & External DEFCAR-R1 0.05s 0.2s 8000001B6F & DEF-ECHO_CS-C From Terminal 2 ≥1 Integral DEFCAR-R2-A...
Page 166 6F2S1915 (0.46) To CRL 8400001B68 TDEFCB From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X DEFCR & 0.00 to 0.30s From VTF 8300001B67 ≥1 ≥1 DEFCF-X VTF_DETECT From PROT COMMON CB_LOSS_PHASE From EF (EF1) TDEFCF 8000001B64 DEFCF-AX DEFCF & & From PROT-COMMON 8100001B65 & DEFCF-BX &...
Page 167 6F2S1915 (0.46) DEF-REVBLK & 8000001B79 & INT.DEFCAR-S-A & 8100001B7A & INT.DEFCAR-S-B 8200001B7B & & INT.DEFCAR-S-C TSBCT-DEF used for the integral carrier communication DEFCAR-OPT-A DEFCAR-OPT-B ≥1 DEFCAR-OPT-C 8F00001B7C ≥1 800000EB55 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK & & DEFCAR-S 810000EB56 DEFCAR_PERMIT used for the external carrier communication DEFCAR Figure 2.4-10 Sending circuit of BOP Coordination with DISCAR protection...
Page 168 6F2S1915 (0.46) after the reception of the DEFCAR signal that is prolonged by the setting [TDEFCF]. Figure 2.4-12 shows the relationship of sending-signal, receiving-signal, and tripping in the DEFCAR function. DEFCAR pickup [TDEFCF] BO Off delay Sending DEFCAR signal Communication delay Receiving DEFCAR signal [TDEFC]=0 DEFCAR issuing a trip signal...
Page 169 6F2S1915 (0.46) Used for the external carrier communication (Carrier signal received at binary inputs) External DEFCAR-R1 Carrier signal 800000EBB1 DEFCAR-R1 & ≥1 & & 800000EBB2 DEFCAR-R1-2 Single DEFCAR-CHSEL Guard Used for the integral carrier communication (Carrier signal transmitted by the transmission control function (DIF_COMM)) Carrier signal (for Phase-A) 800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A...
Page 170 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.4.6 DEFCAR (Function ID: 437001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Carrier_DEF DEF-CAR Off/POP/UOP/BOP DISCAR scheme enable DEF-ECHO Off / On - Echo function enable DEF-WKIT Off / On - Weak infeed trip function enable DEFCAR-CHSEL Single / And / Guard - Carrier channel configuration...
Page 171 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.4.7 Signal monitoring point  CARRIER_DEF (Function ID: 437001) Element ID Name Description 8000001BBB DEF PHSEL-A DEF selected A phase 8100001BBC DEF PHSEL-B DEF selected B phase 8200001BBD DEF PHSEL-C DEF selected C phase 8000001BBE DEF-ECHO BLOCK Echo function blocked 8000001B6D DEF-ECHO_CS-A...
Page 172 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  CARRIER_DEF (Function ID: 437001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B60 EXT.DEFCAR-R1 External DEF carrier received from remote 1 8100001B62 EXT.DEFCAR-R2 External DEF carrier received from remote 2 8000001BB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A DEF carrier received from remote 1 (for integral carrier) 8100001BB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B DEF carrier received from remote 1 (for integral carrier)
Page 173 6F2S1915 (0.46) Overcurrent protection (OC) The phase overcurrent (OC) protection is the major protection function and has both time characteristic and directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OC protection. The user can select various features using the scheme switches provided. The elements are named OC1, OC2, OC3, and OC4;...
Page 174 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay polarity 2.5.1 The user can choose either non-directional OC or directional OC for each OC stage. In addition, the user can further select either the forward or the reverse direction for each of the directional OC elements selected. Characteristic of non-directional OC The characteristic of the non-directional type OC is a circle that has a center at the origin.
Page 175 6F2S1915 (0.46) element for phase-A (OC-A) uses the phase-B-to-phase-C voltage rotated by 90° (V 90°) in the leading direction, this reference signal is illustrated in Figure 2.5-2. The direction of the current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (I ), is determined from the angle measured for I against V...
Page 176 6F2S1915 (0.46) Phase difference calculation |V||I|cos() 0 & Output of 1 directional element & Amplitude calculation |l| OC pickup current Amplitude calculation |Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol) Figure 2.5-3 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory If a single phase is connected to a heavy load, and the other phases are not connected to heavy loads, the user can program separately the directional OC element such that OC will send a trip signal only when the fault current detected is in the same direction among two phases or more of the three-phases.
Page 177 6F2S1915 (0.46) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction (iii) The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the scheme switch, as well as the setting of the directional OC element in the forward direction, provides the setting of the directional OC element in the reverse direction: for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC on stage 1 is considered.
Page 178 6F2S1915 (0.46) The OC element will reset later in a period determined by the characteristics of dependent time resetting. In other words, the user can choose the behavior of the OC element for either faults that are repetitive intermittent or faults that occur in rapid succession. The characteristic for dependent time resetting is selectable from five dependent time characteristics in conformance with IEEE and US standards.
Page 179 6F2S1915 (0.46) time is set using the OC element settings. DT characteristic (ii) The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The user can set the operate time using a setting;...
Page 180 6F2S1915 (0.46) characteristic; “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse; “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse; “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse; “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately Inverse; “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original”...
Page 181 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate time of DT The operate time in the DT is a constant. Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switches [OC1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TOC1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1], but the instantaneous one can also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)’...
Page 182 6F2S1915 (0.46) energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1]. The reducing degree will be determined with the reset curve characteristics defined in the standards. Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1], when the small energized current is continued for timer setting [TOC1R].
Page 183 6F2S1915 (0.46) energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OC1], the element operation will return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.5-2). Time  Energizing current Energizing current cleared by tripping Pickup threshold in relay [OC1] threshold Measuring quantity Inverse-time-reset characteristic...
Page 184 6F2S1915 (0.46) Summary of OC operation (viii) Table 2.5-5 shows the summary of OC operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†). Table 2.5-5 Type and standard board in the OC1 (A tick shows a selectable function) IDMT Characteristics IEC-NI...
Page 185 6F2S1915 (0.46) the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD]. Conversely, when a trip is only required for faults that occur in two or more phases, 2OUTOF3 (a fault occurs in two or more phases) is set for the scheme switch [OC1-OPMD]. Table 2.5-6 Fault type and tripping mode Fault type Setting [OC1-OPMD] Phase-A...
Page 186 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal of OC trip When a user requires an alarm signal in place of the trip signal; for example, set Alarm for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor] for the normal trip operation. Scheme logic 2.5.6 The scheme logic for both the non-directional and the directional OC1 element is illustrated in...
Page 187 6F2S1915 (0.46) No signal due that the PU element is killed. Use ‘OC1-OR’ in place of this. ○ A pick-up signal is generated, but delayed with the IDMT characteristic. ○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly. ○ From OC1 to OC4 logics To TRC OC1-OPT-TRIP ≥1...
Page 188 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.5.7 OC (Function ID: 440001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection scheme switch OC2-EN Off / On - OC2 protection scheme switch OC3-EN Off / On - OC3 protection scheme switch OC4-EN Off / On...
Page 189 6F2S1915 (0.46) OC (Function ID: 440001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000...
Page 190 6F2S1915 (0.46) OC (Function ID: 440001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating TOC2R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 definite time reset delay 0.00 OC2-RTMS- OC2 dependent reset time multiplier of ORG 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 inverse curve OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000...
Page 191 6F2S1915 (0.46) OC (Function ID: 440001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC3 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.00 5.00 5.00 25.00 OC3-DPR 10 - 100 % OC3 drop-out/pick-up ratio OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - OC3 time multiplier of ORG inverse curve 1.000...
Page 192 6F2S1915 (0.46) OC (Function ID: 440001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OC4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC4 reset delay type of US TOC4R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC4 definite time reset delay 0.00 OC4 dependent reset time multiplier of US OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 1.000...
Page 193 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.5.8 Signal monitoring points  OC(Function ID: 440001) Element ID Name Description 8500001B62 OC-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC protection operation 8400001B61 OC-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OC protection operation 8800001B63 OC-OPT-AR OC protection operated (phase-A) 8900001B64 OC-OPT-BR OC protection operated (phase-B) 8A00001B65...
Page 194 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  OC(Function ID: 440001) Element ID Name Description 8100021B61 OC2PU-OR OC2 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR) 8100021BB0 OC2_BLOCK OC2 protection block command 8100021BB1 OC2_INST_OP OC2 protection instant operation command 8800031C20 OC3-A OC3 relay element operated (phase-A) 8200031B6A OC3-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC3 protection operation...
Page 195 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  OC(Function ID: 440001) Element ID Name Description 8100001C72 OC_FL_ST2 Recording start signal (reverse) 8200001C73 OC_FL_ST3 Fault location start signal (forward) 8300001C74 OC_FL_ST4 Fault location start signal (reverse) Connection point in PLC logic  OC(Function ID: 440001) Element ID Name Description...
Page 196 6F2S1915 (0.46) Earth fault protection (EF) The earth fault protection (EF) function has four stages (elements); each element can have either a directional characteristic or non-directional characteristic. To simplify the description, only EF1 is discussed but is applicable to the other EFs; hence, read the expression for EF1 as EF2, EF3 and EF4 at each EF stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided.
Page 197 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay polarity 2.6.1 The user can choose either non-directional EF or directional EF for each EF stage. In addition, the user can further select between the forward or the reverse for each of the directional EF elements selected. Characteristic of non-directional EF The characteristic of the non-directional type EF function is a circle at the origin.
Page 198 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [EF1-Angle] with the value of θ set in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.6-2 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using the θ. The operation of the EF element is based upon the following equation. (2.6-1) 3��...
Page 199 6F2S1915 (0.46) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction (iii) The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional EF element in the forward direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction: for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF element for stage 1 is considered.
Page 200 6F2S1915 (0.46) in section (v). Operate time of IDMT (iii) The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.6-4). (ref IEC 60255-151): (2.6-4) �� ( �� ) = �� × {[ ] + c} α ( I I ⁄...
Page 201 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 2.6-3 IDMT Characteristics curves Operate time of DT (iv) The operate time in the DT is a constant. Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)”...
Page 202 6F2S1915 (0.46) defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151): (2.6-2) �� ( I ) = �� × [ β 1 − ( I I ⁄ ) where: t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds), I = energizing current (amperes), Is = threshold setting (amperes), kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is...
Page 203 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 2.6-4 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves Figure 2.6-5 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting [EF1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [EF1], the element operation will return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.6-2).
Page 204 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reset time of DT (vi) In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant. Summary of EF operation (vii) Table 2.6-4 shows a summary for EF operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†).
Page 205 6F2S1915 (0.46) Blocking EF by ICD The operation of each EF element can be blocked if the ICD function detects a second harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer is energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the second harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present.
Page 206 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000011C23 EF1† 8000011C27 EF1PU† For DT characteristic TEF1 & To Grouping logic 8000011B60 & & For IDMT characteristic ≥1 EF1-OPT 0.00-300.00s EF1 PU & & ≥1 & & From ICD & EF1-OPT-TRIP EF1_Timer Trip ICD-OR & EF1-Usefor IEC-NI &...
Page 207 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.6.7 EF(Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection scheme switch EF2-EN Off / On - EF2 protection scheme switch EF3-EN Off / On - EF3 protection scheme switch EF4-EN Off / On - EF4 protection scheme switch...
Page 208 6F2S1915 (0.46) EF(Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 EF1-kr...
Page 209 6F2S1915 (0.46) EF(Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating EF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF2 reset delay type ORG TEF2R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF2 definite time reset delay 0.00 EF2-RTMS- EF2 dependent reset time multiplier of 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 Original inverse curve...
Page 210 6F2S1915 (0.46) EF(Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating 0.02 - 0.10 - A EF3 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.30 1.50 5.00 25.00 EF3-DPR 10 - 100 % EF3 drop-out/pick-up ratio EF3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - EF3 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 EF3-Rtimer...
Page 211 6F2S1915 (0.46) EF(Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating EF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF4 reset delay type of US TEF4R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF4 definite time reset delay 0.00 EF4 dependent reset time multiplier of US EF4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 1.000...
Page 212 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.6.8 Signal monitoring point  EF(Function ID: 441001) Element ID Name Description 8500001B62 EF-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF function 8400001B61 EF-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal issued in EF function 8300001B23 EF-OPT-TRIP Trip signal issued in EF function 8000011C23 EF1 relay element operated 8200011B62...
Page 213 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point on PLC logic  EF(Function ID: 441001) Element ID Name Description 820003EBB0 EF3_BLOCK EF3 protection block command 820003EBB1 EF3_INST_OP EF3 protection instant operation command 830004EBB0 EF4_BLOCK EF4 protection block command 830004EBB1 EF4_INST_OP EF4 protection instant operation command GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 214 6F2S1915 (0.46) Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) function has both time characteristic and directional elements. Four stages (elements) are available in the OCN function. The user can select various features using the scheme switches provided. The elements are named OCN1, OCN2, and others;...
Page 215 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay polarity 2.7.1 The user can choose either non-directional OCN or directional OCN for each OCN stage. In addition, the user can further select either the forward or the direction for each of the directional OCN elements selected. Characteristic of a non-directional OCN The characteristic of the non-directional type (non-directional OCN) is a circle at the origin.
Page 216 6F2S1915 (0.46) ) for stage 1 with the setting [OCN1] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch [OCN1- Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OCN1-Angle] with the value of θ in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.7-2 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using the θ.
Page 217 6F2S1915 (0.46) Characteristic of directional OCN in the reverse (iii) The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional OCN element in the forward direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction: for example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] when the direction of the OCN element for stage 1 is considered.
Page 218 6F2S1915 (0.46) installed characteristic curves and one user-original characteristic carver where the user can set the equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will be discussed in section (v). Operate time of IDMT (iii) The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (2.7-4). (ref IEC 60255-151): (2.7-4) ��...
Page 219 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 2.7-3 IDMT Characteristics curves Operate time of DT (iv) The operate time in the DT is a constant. Time characteristic The user should set DT for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]. The value of the required operate time is set for the setting [TOCN1] in the range 0.00–300.00s. Instantaneous activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOCN1], but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal “1 (High)”...
Page 220 6F2S1915 (0.46) defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151): (2.7-2) �� ( I ) = �� × [ β 1 − ( I I ⁄ ) where: t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds), I = energizing current (amperes), Is = threshold setting (amperes), kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is...
Page 221 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 2.7-4 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves Figure 2.7-5 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting [OCN1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OCN1], the element operation will return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (2.7-2).
Page 222 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reset time of DT (vi) In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant. Summary of OCN operation (vii) Table 2.7-4 shows a summary for OCN operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†).
Page 223 6F2S1915 (0.46) Harmonic detection The operation of each OCN element can be blocked using a scheme switch, if the ICD function detects a second harmonic current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer is energized. For example, for the OCN1 element, the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the OCN1 element when the second harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present.
Page 224 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000011C23 OCN1† 8000011C27 OCN1PU† For DT characteristic OCN1 TOCN1 & To Grouping logic 8000011B60 & & For IDMT characteristic ≥1 OCN1-OPT 0.00-300.00s OCN1 PU & & & ≥1 & From ICD & OCN1-OPT-TRIP OCN1_Timer TRIP ICD-OR & OCN1-USEFOR IEC-NI &...
Page 225 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.7.7 OCN(Function ID:443001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection scheme switch OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection scheme switch OCN3-EN Off / On - OCN3 protection scheme switch OCN4-EN Off / On - OCN4 protection scheme switch...
Page 226 6F2S1915 (0.46) OCN(Function ID:443001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 definite time reset delay 0.00 OCN1-RTMS- OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier of ORG 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 inverse curve OCN1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient...
Page 227 6F2S1915 (0.46) OCN(Function ID:443001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OCN2-RTMS- OCN2 dependent reset time multiplier of US 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 inverse curve 0.02 - 0.10 - OCN2 A OCN2 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00 5.00...
Page 228 6F2S1915 (0.46) OCN(Function ID:443001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OCN3-RTMS- OCN3 dependent reset time multiplier of 0.010 - 50.000 1.000 IEEE IEEE inverse curve 0.02 - 0.10 - OCN3 A OCN3 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00 5.00...
Page 229 6F2S1915 (0.46) OCN(Function ID:443001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating IEEE 0.02 - 0.10 - OCN4 A OCN4 threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00 5.00 25.00 OCN4-DPR 10 - 100 % OCN4 drop-out/pick-up ratio OCN4-TMS- 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN4 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000...
Page 230 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.7.8 Signal monitoring point  OCN(Function ID: 443001) Element ID Name Description OCN-ARC-BLOCK 8500001B62 Autoreclose block signal by OCN protection OCN-OPT-ALARM 8400001B61 Alarm signal by OCN protection OCN-OPT-TRIP 8300001B23 Trip signal by OCN protection OCN1 8000011C23 OCN1 relay element operated OCN1-ARC-BLOCK 8200011B62...
Page 231 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point on PLC logic  OCN(Function ID: 443001) Element ID Name Description 820003EBB0 OCN3_BLOCK OCN3 protection block command 820003EBB1 OCN3_INST_OP OCN3 protection instant operation command 830004EBB0 OCN4_BLOCK OCN4 protection block command 830004EBB1 OCN4_INST_OP OCN4 protection instant operation command GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 232 6F2S1915 (0.46) Thermal overload function (THM) Apparatus such as cables, transformers, generators and others can become overheated when overloaded beyond their respective design limits due to excessive demands being placed on the system. The thermal overload function (THM) works by determining the temperature rise in an item of primary equipment by monitoring the current in order to detect the thermal overload of the apparatus.
Page 233 6F2S1915 (0.46) Thermal state determination 2.8.1 THM simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect an overload condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined with the following equation: �� −�� τ ⁄ (2.8-1) θ = (1 − �� ) ×...
Page 234 6F2S1915 (0.46) Thermal characteristic 2.8.2 THM characteristics are determined with two equations. Equation (2.8-3) is used to define the cold state. Equation (2.8-4) is used to define the hot state: �� (2.8-3) t = τ ∙ Ln [ �� − �� ...
Page 235 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.8.3 Figure 2.8-2 shows the scheme logic for THM. THM has two thresholds; threshold “A” is used for alarming, threshold “T” for tripping. The name of the output signal for the alarm is termed THM-OPT-ALARM and that of the output signal for tripping is termed “THM-OPT-TRIP”. The threshold level for the alarm is set using setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping threshold.
Page 236 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.8.4 THM (Function ID: 451001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating THM-EN Off / On - Thermal protection scheme switch 0.40 - 2.00 - A Thermal overload current 1.00 5.00 2.00 10.00 TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 Thermal time constant...
Page 237 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.8.5 Signal monitoring point  THM(Function ID: 451001) Element ID Name Description 8000011C23 THM-A THM relay element operated (Alarm) 8000011B60 THM-ALARM THM protection Alarm signal 8400011B23 THM-OPT-ALARM THM protection operated (Alarm) 8300021B23 THM-OPT-TRIP THM protection operated (Trip) 8100021C23 THM-T THM relay element operated (Trip)
Page 238 6F2S1915 (0.46) Broken conductor protection (BCD) A series fault or an open circuit fault can be caused by circuit breaker contact failure, the operation of fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear. IEC60050 defines a series fault as having impedances in each of three-phases that are not equal; hence, the series fault is typified by the interruption of one or two phases, as a rule.
Page 239 6F2S1915 (0.46) Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault 2.9.1 Figure 2.9-1 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when a single-phase series fault occurs. We can represent the series fault by the positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence impedances; the impedances are distributed to the left and right as shown in the diagram of the primary circuit below.
Page 240 6F2S1915 (0.46) From Equation (2.9-1), (2.9-2), and (2.9-3), the following equations are derived: �� + �� (2.9-4) ( �� − �� 1�� 1�� 1�� + �� + �� −�� (2.9-5) ( �� − �� 2��...
Page 241 6F2S1915 (0.46) Characteristic and setting 2.9.2 The hatched area of Figure 2.9-2 illustrates the BCD characteristic; the BCD function will operate when the positive sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, the negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In, and the ratio |I | is higher than setting [BCD].
Page 242 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.9.4 Figure 2.9-3 shows the scheme logic for the BCD function. The BCD function issues a trip signal through a delayed pick-up timer, the value of which is set for [TBCD]. The operation of the BCD function can be disabled using scheme switch [BCD-EN] Off. 8000001C23 From ICD &...
Page 243 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.9.6 Signal monitoring point  BCD(Function ID: 452001) Element ID Name Description 8000001C23 BCD relay element operated 8000001B60 BCD-OPT BCD protection operated 8000001BB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD protection block command 8300001B23 BCD-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by BCD1 protection operation 8400001B62 BCD-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by BCD1 protection operation...
Page 244 6F2S1915 (0.46) Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to remove a fault as a consequence of the CB failing to open, the function of circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) is to remove the fault by the back-tripping of other CBs.
Page 245 6F2S1915 (0.46) CBF operation and its elements 2.10.1 The operation of CBF is initiated by the operation of OCCBF and EFCBF, which monitors fault current after the issuance of a trip signal by other protection functions. OCCBF or EFCBF monitor the fault current so that the CBF feature can determine the failure of the CB to operate. For CBF, the respective phase currents in three-phase system are monitored by the OCCBF- A, OCCBF-B and OCCBF-C elements, while the zero-sequence current is monitored by the EFCBF element.
Page 246 6F2S1915 (0.46) One of the benefits of the “re-trip” function is that it can used to avoid accidental tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly requisite during maintenance and testing of the system. Retrip Backup feature 2.10.3 Normal trip As cited above, “re-trip”...
Page 247 6F2S1915 (0.46) fault in response to the “re-trip” command, OCCBF and EFCBF would reset and the CBF sequence is stopped. If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the “re-trip” command, and if OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer #2 were to time out in accordance with the setting time applied [TCBF1-TP], CBF will issue a trip signal to the adjacent CB(s) to clear the fault, as a last resort.
Page 248 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.10.4 CBF function can issue a trip signal in each phase. The trip signal will be generated where OCCBF1 or EFCBF1 element is being operated and signals ‘GEN.TRIP-*’† are generated constantly. In other words, the circuit breaker has not been opened successfully with the GEN.TRIP-* so that the fault has not been cleared yet;...
Page 249 6F2S1915 (0.46) TCBF1-TP 8800011B24 CBF1_START-A CBF1_TRIP-A & ≥1 ≥1 8900011B25 CBF1_START-B CBF1_TRIP-B & ≥1 ≥1 8A00011B26 CBF1_START-C CBF1_TRIP-C & ≥1 ≥1 0.000-300.000s 8B00011B27 ○ CBF1_TRIP CBF1-RETRIP-A ≥1 & & CBF1-RETRIP-B & & CBF1-RETRIP-C & To TRC & CBF1_ARC-BLOCK ≥1 CBF1-RETRIP &...
Page 250 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation timing 2.10.5 The OCCBF and EFCBF elements can check that the target CB has opened normally and that the fault current has disappeared completely. Because load current is usually present, the OCCBF and EFCBF settings should be account for between 10% and 200% of the rated current. The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined in relation to the opening time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements (see Toc and Tcb in Figure 2.10-1).
Page 251 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.10.6 CBF(Function ID: 453001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating CBF-EN Off / On - CBF protection scheme switch OCCBF-EN Off / On - Current flow is judged by OC relay operation 0.10 - 0.50 - OCCBF1 relay operating level (Current flow...
Page 252 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.10.7 Signal monitoring points  CBF(Function ID: 453001) Element ID Name Description 8000011C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A) 8100011C21 OCCBF1-B OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-B) 8200011C22 OCCBF1-C OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-C) 8400011C27 EFCBF1 EFCBF1 relay element operated 8000011B20 CBF1_RETRIP-A OCCBF1 Retrip (phase-A)
Page 253 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  CBF(Function ID: 453001) Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 EXT.CBF1_START-A External CBF1 start(phase-A) 810001EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-B External CBF1 start(phase-B) 820001EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-C External CBF1 start(phase-C) 830001EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START External CBF1 start 800001EBB4 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 protection block command 810001EBB5 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 instantaneous retrip...
Page 254 6F2S1915 (0.46) Stub protection with overcurrent relay (STUB-OC) Figure 2.11-1 illustrates a one-and-a-half breaker (1.5CBs) arrangement with a transmission line including a disconnector (DS). An area ‘stub zone’ is defined within two CBs and the DS, which is expressed by hatching in the figure. For the 1.5CB arrangement, a voltage transformer (VT) is generally installed along the line GH.
Page 255 6F2S1915 (0.46) Stub-OC characteristic 2.11.1 The characteristic of the stub-OC element is shown as a circle that has a center at the origin, as shown in Figure 2.11-2. The user can set the threshold value of the stub-OC element using setting [OCSTUB].
Page 256 6F2S1915 (0.46) currents. Either Block-3P or Block-PerP should be set for the scheme switch [OCSTUB-2fBlk]: the Block-3P is used when the trip signal should be blocked when the 2f is observed in three- phase; whereas the Block-PerP is used when the trip signal should be blocked when 2f is observed in a phase.
Page 257 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.11.3 STUBOC(Function ID: 455001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating STUBOC-EN Off / On - Stub-OC protection enable OCSTUB 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC relay for stub threshold 1.20 6.00 3.00 15.00 OCSTUB-2fBlk Non / Block-3P /...
Page 258 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.11.4 Signal monitoring point  STUB_OC(Function ID: 455001) Element ID Name Description 8000001C20 OCSTUB-A STUBOC relay element operated (phase-A) 8100001C21 OCSTUB-B STUBOC relay element operated (phase-B) 8200001C22 OCSTUB-C STUBOC relay element operated (phase-C) 8000001B60 OCSTUB-OR STUBOC relay element operated (3-phases OR) 8200001B65 STUB-R_COND Remote terminal DS condition...
Page 259 6F2S1915 (0.46) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV) The over voltage protection function for phase (OV) detects an over voltage condition that phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OV function has two stages (elements; OV1 and OV2), which operate independently. The OV element has a time delay characteristic;...
Page 260 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drop-off and pickup characteristic 2.12.1 Figure 2.12-1 shows the characteristic of the OV element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OV. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.12-1 Characteristic of OV element...
Page 261 6F2S1915 (0.46) level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.12-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OV element when a multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] is used. The OV element uses Equation (2.12-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: �� (2.12-1) t ( G ) = TMS ×...
Page 262 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.12-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve Set item IDMT User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 (Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step Reset feature The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.12-3 shows that examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time.
Page 263 6F2S1915 (0.46) Condition fault occurrence Intermittent fault Series faults Fault observation by the relay Issue of trip command Relay operation reset Incrimination of time counter corresponding to the fault duration. Trip level Tripping Increment process in time Reset of time counter counter : Resetting time set by the user : Actual resetting time in the relay operation...
Page 264 6F2S1915 (0.46) generates a pick-up signal when the entering voltage is excesses of the threshold anytime. For example, in the IDMT characteristic, the user can measure the pickup time after the excess using both PLC monitoring points “8000011C20” and “8000011C24”. IDMT OV1-Timer Original...
Page 265 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting list 2.12.6 OV(Function ID: 460101) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OV1-EN Off / On - OV1 protection scheme switch OV2-EN Off / On - OV2 protection scheme switch OV1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - OV1 delay type 1.0 - 220.0 V OV1 threshold...
Page 266 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.12.7 Signal monitoring point  OV(Function ID: 460101) Element ID Name Description 8800001B62 OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A) 8400001B61 OV-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OV protection 8900001B63 OV-OPT-B OV protection operated (phase-B) 8A00001B64 OV-OPT-C OV protection operated (phase-C) 8300001B23 OV-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OV protection...
Page 267 6F2S1915 (0.46) Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) The over voltage protection function in phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage condition that phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OVS function has two stages (elements; OVS1 and OVS2), which operate independently. The OVS element has a time delay characteristic;...
Page 268 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drop-off and pickup setting 2.13.1 Figure 2.13-1 shows the characteristic of the OVS element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVS. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.13-1 Characteristic of OVS element...
Page 269 6F2S1915 (0.46) conformity to IEC 60255-127: �� t ( G ) = TMS × {[ (2.13-1) ] + ��} �� ( �� ⁄ ) − 1 �� where, t = operating time (seconds), V = energizing voltage (voltage), Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.13-2.
Page 270 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reset feature The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.13-3 shows that examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of the time counter furnished in the OVS1 element is incremented if faults occur. As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the trip level.
Page 271 6F2S1915 (0.46) failure. Switch of OVS trip command (ii) The OVS function issues a trip command for the trip circuit (TRC†) when Trip is set for scheme switch [OVS1-UseFor] as the normal trip operation. However, when an alarm signal in place of the trip command is required, the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch [OVS1-UseFor].
Page 272 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting list 2.13.6 OVS(Function ID: 461101) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OVS1-EN Off / On - OVS1 protection scheme switch OVS2-EN Off / On - OVS2 protection scheme switch OVS1 OVS1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - OVS1 delay type OVS1 1.0 - 220.0...
Page 273 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.13.7 Signal monitoring point  OVS(Function ID: 461101) Element ID Name Description 8C00001B62 OVS-OPT-AB OVS protection operated (phase-AB) 8400001B61 OVS-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS protection 8D00001B63 OVS-OPT-BC OVS protection operated (phase-BC) 8E00001B64 OVS-OPT-CA OVS protection operated (phase-CA) 8300001B23 OVS-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OVS protection...
Page 274 6F2S1915 (0.46) Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) The earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) function has two stages (OVG1 and OVG2); and the time characteristic of each stage can be taken from either definite time or inverse definite minimum time. The purpose of each stage of the OVG is to detect earth fault on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or AC generators.
Page 275 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drop-off and pickup setting 2.14.1 Figure 2.14-1 shows the characteristic of the OVG element. The outer circle shows the threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVG. Pickup Dropoff Figure 2.14-1 Setting points of OVG...
Page 276 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation feature The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.14-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVG element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVG element uses Equation (2.14-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127: ��...
Page 277 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.14-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve Set item IDMT User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 (Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step Reset feature The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.14-3 shows that examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time.
Page 278 6F2S1915 (0.46) Miscellaneous functions 2.14.4 OVG operation blocked by the occurrence of VT failure Blocking the OVG function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs. The user shall set Block for scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set for scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk] in order that the OVG function is not blocked by the failure.
Page 279 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000011C23 OVG1 TOVG1 8000011B60 & & 8000011C27 OVG1-OPT & ≥1 OVG1 PU 0.00-300.00s OVG1-EN & VTF_DETECT & ≥1 OVG1-VTFBlk OV1-VTFBlk CB_LOSS_PHASE OVG1-BLOCK 8000011B23 8300011B23 & ≥1 IDMT OVG-OPT-TRIP OVG1-Timer Original 8100021B61 Trip ≥1 8400001B61 OVG1-UseFor Alarm & OVG-OPT-ALARM ≥1 8000021B23 OVG2 logic...
Page 280 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.14.6 OVG(Function ID: 462101) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OVG1-EN Off / On - OVG1 protection scheme switch OVG2-EN Off / On - OVG2 protection scheme switch OVG1 OVG1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - OVG1 delay type OVG1 1.0 - 220.0...
Page 281 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.14.7 Signal monitoring point  OVG(Function ID: 462101) Element ID Name Description 8400001B61 OVG-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection 8300001B23 OVG-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by OVG protection 8000011C23 OVG1 OVG1 relay element operated 8000011B60 OVG1-OPT OVG1 protection operated 8100011B61 OVG1-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG1 protection...
Page 282 6F2S1915 (0.46) Phase under-voltage protection (UV) The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-earth (UV) consists of two stages (elements) independently: UV1 and UV2. The time characteristic of the UV element is configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings. Each UV stage (element) detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth.
Page 283 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drop-off and pick-up characteristic 2.15.1 Figure 2.15-1 shows the UV characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick- up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1]. The DO voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1-DPR].
Page 284 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting pick-up operation The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 2.15-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed to Equation (2.15-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127 ��...
Page 285 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.15-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT Set item IDMT User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 (Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step Setting drop-off operation The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic.
Page 286 6F2S1915 (0.46) Miscellaneous functions 2.15.3 Blocking UV operation Blocking the UV function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs. In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk] in order that the UV function is not blocked by the failure.
Page 287 6F2S1915 (0.46) TUV1 8000011B20 8000011B62 To TRC & & & 8100011B21 UV-OPT-A ≥1 ≥1 8100011B63 & & 8200011B22 & ≥1 UV-OPT-B ≥1 8200011B64 & & & ≥1 UV-OPT-C ≥1 8000011B60 ≥1 0.00 to 300.00s 8000011B65 UV1-OPT & 8000011B24 ≥1 UV2-OPT 8100011B25 &...
Page 288 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.15.5 UV(Function ID: 470101) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating UVBLK Off / On - Operation canceled when UVBLK operated UVBLK 10.0 V Threshold of UVBLK element 10.0 TUVBLK 10.00 S UVBLK operation delay timer 10.00 UV1-EN Off / On...
Page 289 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.15.6 Signal monitoring point  UV(Function ID: 470101) Element ID Name Description 8000011C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A) 8100011C21 UV1-B UV1 relay element operated (phase-B) 8200011C22 UV1-C UV1 relay element operated (phase-C) 8000011B60 UV1-OR UV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR) 8000011C24 UV1PU-A UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
Page 290 6F2S1915 (0.46) Phase-to-phase under-voltage protection (UVS) The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (UVS) consists of two stages (elements) independently: UVS1 and UVS2. The time characteristic of the UVS element is configured either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) using settings. Each UVS element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-phase.
Page 291 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drop-off and pick-up characteristic 2.16.1 Figure 2.16-1 shows the UVS characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick- up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1]. The DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1-DPR].
Page 292 6F2S1915 (0.46) Pick-up characteristic The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1 element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 2.16-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed to Equation (2.16-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127 ��...
Page 293 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.16-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT Set item IDMT User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 (Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step by 0.00001 step Drop-off characteristic The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 2.16-3 shows examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time.
Page 294 6F2S1915 (0.46) Miscellaneous functions 2.16.3 Block of UVS operation Blocking the UVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs. In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the UVS function is not blocked by the failure.
Page 295 6F2S1915 (0.46) TUVS1 8000011B20 8000011B62 To TRC & & & 8100011B21 UVS-OPT-AB ≥1 ≥1 8100011B63 UVS1 & & 8200011B22 & ≥1 UVS-OPT-BC ≥1 8200011B64 & & & ≥1 UVS-OPT-CA ≥1 8000011B60 ≥1 0.00 to 300.00s 8000011B65 UVS1-OPT & 8000011B24 ≥1 UVS2-OPT 8100011B25 &...
Page 296 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.16.5 UVS(Function ID: 471101) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating UVSBLK-EN Off / On - Operation canceled when UVSBLK operated UVSBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V Threshold of UVSBLK element 10.0 TUVBLK 0.00 – 300.00 s UVSBLK operation delay timer 10.00 UVS1-EN...
Page 297 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.16.6 Signal monitoring point  UVS(Function ID: 471101) Element ID Name Description 8000001BB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open 8100001BB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open 8200001BB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open 8C00001B65 UVS-OPT-AB UVS protection operated (phase-AB) 8400001B64 UVS-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS protection...
Page 298 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  UVS(Function ID: 471101) Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open 810000EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open 820000EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open 800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command 810002EBB0 UVS2_BLOCK UVS2 protection block command GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 299 6F2S1915 (0.46) Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) The frequency protection (FRQ and DFRQ) functions have six frequency elements (stages) to detect frequency-deviations and frequency-changes, respectively. If the deviations or changes are appeared, the FRQ and DFRQ function can issue a trip signal (or an alarm signal) in response to the degree of the frequency-deviation and the frequency-change.
Page 300 6F2S1915 (0.46) FRQ features and characteristics 2.17.1 UF/OF characteristic The UF and OF elements check the frequency every 5msec; they determines the frequency- deviations whether the frequency is in under-frequency or over-frequency. Figure 2.17-1(a) shows the UF characteristic; Figure 2.17-1(b) shows the OF characteristic; hatched area reflects operation zone of the UF and the OF elements.
Page 301 6F2S1915 (0.46) FRQ trip signal (iii) The FRQ can issue a trip signal for the function of trip circuit (TRC) when Trip is set for scheme switch [FRQ1-UseFor]. However, when an alarm signal is required in place of the trip signal, the user should set Alarm for scheme switch [FRQ1-UseFor].
Page 302 6F2S1915 (0.46) DFRQ features and characteristics 2.17.2 RISE/DOWN characteristic The RISE and DOWN elements calculate the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) every 5msec. Figure 2.17-3 shows how to calculate the gradient using Δf and Δt: the change of frequency (Δf) over a time interval and Δt equals to 100ms. Six elements are provided for the DFRQ function;...
Page 303 6F2S1915 (0.46) DFRQ scheme logic (iv) Figure 2.17-4 shows the scheme logic of the DFRQ function. Each stage operates independently. PLC connection point “DFRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block the stage1; hence the user can connect an external signal to this PLC connection point when the external signal is provided to block the stage 1.
Page 304 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.17.3 FRQ(Function ID: 475001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating FRQ-EN Off / On FRQ protection enable FRQBLK 40.0 - 100.0 Threshold to cancel FRQ operations 40.0 FRQ1-EN Off / On FRQ1 protection enable FRQ2-EN Off / On FRQ2 protection enable...
Page 305 6F2S1915 (0.46) FRQ(Function ID: 475001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Output DFRQ5-UseFor Trip / Alarm DFRQ5 used for trip or alarm Trip DFRQ6 DFRQ6-Chara Rise / Down The selection of DFRQ6 character Down DFRQ6 0.1 - 15.0 DFRQ6 threshold Hz/s...
Page 306 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.17.4 Signal monitoring point  FRQ(Function ID: 475001) Element ID Name Description 8400101B61 DFRQ-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by DFRQ protection 8300101B23 DFRQ-OPT-TRIP Trip signal by DFRQ protection 8100111B61 DFRQ-S1-ALARM Alarm signal by DFRQ1 protection 8000111BB1 DFRQ-S1-OPT DFRQ1 protection operated 8000111B23 DFRQ-S1-TRIP Trip signal by DFRQ1 protection...
Page 307 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  FRQ(Function ID: 475001) Element ID Name Description 8100021B61 FRQ-S2-ALARM Alarm signal by FRQ2 protection 8100021BB1 FRQ-S2-OPT FRQ2 protection operated 8000021B23 FRQ-S2-TRIP Trip signal by FRQ2 protection 8100031B61 FRQ-S3-ALARM Alarm signal by FRQ3 protection 8200031BB1 FRQ-S3-OPT FRQ3 protection operated 8000031B23...
Page 308 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  FRQ(Function ID: 475001) Element ID Name Description 810012EBB0 DFRQ2_BLOCK DFRQ2 protection block command 810012EBB1 DFRQ-S2-OPT DFRQ2 protection operated 820003EBB0 FRQ3_BLOCK FRQ3 protection block command 820003EBB1 FRQ-S3-OPT FRQ3 protection operated 820013EBB0 DFRQ3_BLOCK DFRQ3 protection block command 820013EBB1 DFRQ-S3-OPT DFRQ3 protection operated...
Page 309 6F2S1915 (0.46) Out of step tripping protection by distance relay (OSTZ) System faults, line switching and the loss of application of large blocks of loads will induce the change of electrical characteristics at any time at which the output of the generator and the input of the load remain constant relatively in the system.
Page 310 6F2S1915 (0.46) Phenomenon and principle of out-of-step 2.18.1 Occurrence of out-of-step Figure 2.18-1 shows simple two power sources (machines) system; it introduces the discussion of a transient operation. Electrical center is at which the impedances to the opposite terminals are equal. Electrical center Bus G...
Page 311 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 2.18-3 shows another impedance locus when transient power swing occurs; the OSTZ function does not detect the out-of-step condition when this impedance locus is observed†. Distance relay in MHO characteristic (operation area is represented in hatching.) Impedance locus Load Area Locus seen from Relay A Figure 2.18-3 Impedance locus during transient power swing...
Page 312 6F2S1915 (0.46) where, measured reactance measured resistance reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XB] reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XF] resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R1] resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R2] OSTZ-ZN OSTZ-ZM OSTZ-XF Zone C Zone B Zone A 75...
Page 313 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic and setting 2.18.4 Figure 2.18-5 shows the scheme logic of the OSTZ function. When the condition of out-of-step is yielded, the OSTZ function can detect the motion of the loci impedance from Zone A, Zone B to Zone C .
Page 314 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000001C20 8200001B6A & ≥1 OSTZ-OPT & ≥1 8100001C21 Decision logic OSTZ-ZM 8000001B69 for phase-AB To TRC & 8200001C22 & 8300001B23 & OSTZ-OPT-TRIP & & 0.1s OSTZ-ARC-BLOCK 8000001C24 & & & 8100001C25 Decision logic OSTZ-ZN for phase-BC 8200001C26 & &...
Page 315 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.18.5 OSTZ(Function ID: 478001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating OSTZ-EN Off / On - OSTZ protection scheme switch 15.00 - 3.000 - OSTZ-R1 - OSTZ resistive reach (at Right side) 25.50 5.100 150.00 30.000...
Page 316 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.18.6 Signal monitoring point  OSTZ(Function ID: 478001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B69 OSTZ OSTZ-AB or OSTZ-BC or OSTZ-CA 8000001B66 OSTZ-AB OSTZ phase AB operation 8100001B67 OSTZ-BC OSTZ phase BC operation 8200001B68 OSTZ-CA OSTZ phase CA operation 8200001B6A OSTZ-OPT OSTZ protection operated...
Page 317 6F2S1915 (0.46) Inrush current detection function (ICD) When a current transformer (CT) is first energized, an inrush current flows into the CT transiently to establish the magnetic field. The magnitude of the inrush current can greater than the full load current so much; thus, the protection function can issue trip signals falsely. That is, the inrush current is required to detected and the protection functions shall not operate during CT energizing.
Page 318 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation and characteristic 2.19.1 The ICD function examines the ratio of a second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental current (I1f) in each phase. If the ratio | I is larger than the setting [ICD-2f], the ICD | | I ⁄...
Page 319 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.19.3 ICD(Function ID: 480001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ICD-EN Off / On - ICD function scheme switch ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity of 2f 0.10 - 0.50 - ICD-OC A Threshold of fundamental current 0.50 2.50...
Page 320 6F2S1915 (0.46) Fail safe (FS) Various protection functions are connected to a trip function, which opens circuit breakers. The operation of the trip function should be reliable correctly in enough, if the function of fail-safe (FS) is provided. That FS function includes overcurrent element (OCFS), phase current change detector element (OCDFS), earth fault element (EFFS), multi-level overcurrent element (OCMFS), under-voltage element for phase-to-ground (UVFS), under-voltage element for phase-to-phase fault (UVSFS), and under-voltage change detection element (DUVFS).
Page 321 6F2S1915 (0.46) Overcurrent element (OCFS) 2.20.1 Three overcurrent elements consist for the three-phases: OCFS-A, OCFS-B, and OCFS-C. Their pick values of those elements are determined by a setting [OCFS]. Those element can operate when On is set for scheme switch [OCFS-EN]. Phase current change detector element (OCDFS) 2.20.2 Three elements consist for three-phases and they are used to detect changing currents per...
Page 322 6F2S1915 (0.46) Multi-level overcurrent elements (OCMFS) 2.20.4 Characteristic of OCMFS A current fluctuates when there is a condition about out of step, so the function of multi-level overcurrent elements (OCMFS) is provided in the FS function. That function includes seven detectors placed at seven multiple levels.
Page 323 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.20-2 Level Detector Settings 1A rating 5A rating Detector Operating (A) Resetting (A) Operating (A) Resetting (A) 0.10 0.08 0.50 0.40 0.16 0.13 0.80 0.65 0.26 0.21 1.30 1.05 0.41 0.33 2.05 1.65 0.66 0.53 3.30 2.65 1.05 0.84 5.25...
Page 324 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.20.8 The scheme logics of the FS are shown in Figure 2.20-3 and Figure 2.20-4. Each element has a scheme switch to enable its operation. In order not to operate the FS, Off has to be for the scheme switch [FS-EN], so the FS function will not influence tripping.
Page 325 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8300041B60 8000041C60 & ≥1 OCMFS_OP & 8100041C61 & & 8200041C62 To OSTZ & 8000041B61 OCMFS_OP_SEP 8300041C63 ≥1 & 8400041C64 & 8500041C65 & 8600041C66 & On-T On-S OCMFS-EN FS-EN=OFF 8F00031C23 EFFS & EFFS-OP EFFS-EN Figure 2.20-4 Soft fail scheme logic (2) To TRC OCFS-OP 8000001B23...
Page 326 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.20.9 FS (Function ID: 48B001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating FS-EN Off / On - Fail safe scheme switch OCFS-EN Off / On - OCFS scheme switch OCDFS-EN Off / On - OCDFS scheme switch EFFS-EN Off / On...
Page 327 6F2S1915 (0.46) 2.20.10 Data ID list  Signal monitoring point FS(Function ID: 48B001) Element ID Name Description 8800071C20 DUVFS-A DUVFS relay element operated (phase-A) 8900071C21 DUVFS-B DUVFS relay element operated (phase-B) 8A00071C22 DUVFS-C DUVFS relay element operated (phase-C) 8A00071B60 DUVFS-OR DUVFS relay element operated (3-phase OR) 8F00031C23 EFFS...
Page 328 6F2S1915 (0.46) VT failure detection (VTF) If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the operation in relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure voltages correctly. Therefore, the VT failure detection (VTF) function is provided to block operating the relays upon occurrence of the VT failure.
Page 329 6F2S1915 (0.46) VTF features 2.21.1 The VTF function has three relay elements in order to decide the failure in the VT; hence two criterions (i.e., for VTF1 and VTF2) exist to detect the failure in the VT. Phase-to-earth under voltage element (UVVTF) For the VTF1 function, the under-voltage element (UVVTF) monitors the under voltage.
Page 330 6F2S1915 (0.46) VTF Logic 2.21.3 Figure 2.21-1 shows the logics of the VTF function. As described earlier, the VT failure is grouped into the VTF1 criterion (VTF1_DETECT) and the VTF2 criterion (VTF2_DETECT). When we consider the VTF1 criterion, the upper logic in Figure 2.21-1 is used; whereas we consider the VTF2 criterion, lower one is used.
Page 331 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay application: Distance protection, the ZS/ZG protections, see Chapter when available. Note: Output signals are provided for respective relays when the relays are available. Appendix: Ordering whether the relays are supplied into the IED. User Note: AMF feature is used for the test. To generate the AMF signal, see chapter interface: Test-submenu If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “VTF_BLOCK”, the operation of the VTF function is blocked.
Page 332 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.21.4 VTF(Function ID: 490001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating VTF1 VTF1-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF1 scheme switch UVVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V Phase under voltage revel for VTF1 detection 20.0 VTF2 VTF2-EN...
Page 333 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.21.5 Signal monitoring point  VTF(Function ID: 490001) Element ID Name Description 8400001C2B EFVTF EFVTF relay element operated 8100001BB1 EXTERNAL VTF External VTF receive 8800001C27 OVGVTF OVGVTF relay element operated 8000001C20 UVVTF-A UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-A) 8100001C21 UVVTF-B UVVTF relay element operated(Phase-B)
Page 334 6F2S1915 (0.46) CT failure detection (CTF) If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the current transformer (CT), the operation in relays cannot be obtained properly because the relays do not measure incoming currents correctly. Therefore, the CT failure detection (CTF) function is provided to block operating the relays upon occurrence of the CT failure.
Page 335 6F2S1915 (0.46) CTF features 2.22.1 The CTF function has two relay elements in order to decide the failure in the CT; hence two criterions exist to detect the failure in the CT in the CTF function. Earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF) The earth fault overcurrent element (EFCTF) monitors the zero-sequence current for the failure in the CT.
Page 336 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000001C23 EFCTF & 8100001B60 8000001B61 ≥1 CTF_ALARM To Automatic supervision 10.0s ≥1 0.015s 8100001C27 OVGCTF 0.1s & ≥1 CTF-EN OPT-On & From PROT-CCOMMON CB_ALLPH_CLOSE To EF To BCD 0.02s To OCN From DISTANSE-ZS 8000001B62 PSBS-VCTF-BLK ≥1 ≥1 CTF_DETECT From DISTANSE-ZG PSBG-VCTF-BLK From test...
Page 337 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.22.4 CTF(Function ID: 491001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating CTF-EN Off / On / OPT-On - CTF scheme switch Threshold of overvoltage in zero-sequence OVGCTF 1.0 - 220.0 20.0 phase to stop CTF detection 0.10 - 0.50 - Threshold of overcurrent in zero-sequence...
Page 338 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.22.5 Signal monitoring point  CTF(Function ID: 491001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B61 CTF ALARM CTF alarm operated 8000001BB0 CTF BLOCK CTF block operated 8100001B60 CTF DET CTF det 8000001B62 CTF DETECT CTF detect 8000001C23 EFCTF EFCTF relay element operated 8100001BB1 EXTERNAL CTF...
Page 339 6F2S1915 (0.46) Single-end fault locator (FL-Z) The function of the single-end fault locator (FL) is to determine the location of faults that occur on a transmission line with a high degree of reliability. Determination of the location of faults provides a useful contribution to the recovery of circuits in the event of power system failures. Fault location is provided by the FL function;...
Page 340 6F2S1915 (0.46) Computation method 2.23.1 The FL calculation requires more than three cycles of power system information to determine the location of the fault. The FL calculation uses a reference current (I f ’) obtained by measuring the change in the current before and after the occurrence of a fault. The reference current (I f ’) removes the influence of load current (I L ) and arc voltage.
Page 341 6F2S1915 (0.46) Line GH Distance GF Bus G Bus H Line 1 Fault F Source Load/Source Line 2 G’ H’ Figure 2.23-1 Relationship between fault location and local IED in parallel line − I – I (2.23-1) α − I –...
Page 342 6F2S1915 (0.46) [FL_Ka] Imaginary part when a value is placed in parentheses Im( ): Real part when a value is placed in parentheses Re( ): Length of line GH in kilometers or miles, [FL_line_km] / [FL_line_mile] • : Symbol of Vector product Equation (2.23-3) is used generally when the transmission lines are treated as having lumped constants.
Page 343 6F2S1915 (0.46) as having lumped constants; Equation (2.23-8) is sufficient to compute the fault distance (GF = χ) for faults that occur within 100km (62 mile) of the length of the transmission line. When the fault distance is greater than 100km (62 mile), Equation (2.23-4) is used to obtain a compensated value for the fault distance (GF = χ").
Page 344 6F2S1915 (0.46) As shown in Figure 2.23-1, a single IED is located near Bus G. When a fault (F) occurs on the line GH, the fault distance (GF) is calculated in percent using the following equation. Distance to fault F (2.23-9) Fault distance (%) = ×...
Page 345 6F2S1915 (0.46) Z aa =Z bb =Z cc and Z ab =Z bc =Z ca ), then symmetrical setting is applicable. If the impedance unbalances cannot be ignored, the user shall set a compensation factor (section (i)-4) or use a matrix setting (section (ii)).The following equations are used to acquire the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedances.
Page 346 6F2S1915 (0.46) − Z (2.23-12) − Z (2.23-13) − Z (2.23-14) − (2.23-15) − (2.23-16) − (2.23-17) Impedance setting using matrix components (ii) With regard to Figure 2.23-1, when the voltage and current on a transmission line can be expressed using matrix components, the user can select the following matrix setting: (2.23-18) ] = [ where,...
Page 347 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting self-impedances With regard to the self-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the self- impedances for settings [FL_Raa], [FL_Rbb] and [FL_Rcc] and set the reactance of the self-impedances for settings [FL_Xaa], [FL_Xbb] and [FL_Xcc]. Setting mutual-impedances With regard to setting the mutual-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the mutual-impedance for settings [FL_Rab], [FL_Rbc] and [FL_Rca] and set the reactance of the mutual-impedances for settings [FL_Xab], [FL_Xbc], and [FL_Xca].
Page 348 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.23-3 Setting [FL_DIR] corresponding to the setting of OC and other relay elements Direction of the relay (OC element etc) Scheme switch [FL_DIR] Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Non-dir Forward / Reverse Setting the unit of length/distance (iv) As shown in Figure 2.23-2, the fault location is displayed in kilometers when km is set for scheme switch [FL_Unit].
Page 349 6F2S1915 (0.46) together with a brief description of each method and the settings necessary for an earth fault. Table 2.23-4 Method and setting of earth fault compensation Required setting objects Required power Compensation Description of the compensation system quantities method method for respective operation...
Page 350 6F2S1915 (0.46) operation signals are summarized by the “OR” logic of Figure 2.23-4. This logic has selection scheme that is prescribed by scheme switch [FL-Dir]. As a result, the FL can record the current and voltage data if the fault occurs in either the forward direction or the reverse direction. Note: For the FL calculation, it is required to fit the direction of the FL calculation between the FL and other protection function.
Page 351 6F2S1915 (0.46) FL calculation start Figure 2.23-5 shows logic for the FL calculation. In this logic, starting signals from the respective protection functions are provided for the FL. Note that the operation resultants of respective functions are used to start the FL calculation. The operation resultants are not the same as the operation signals of the protection elements, as in Figure 2.23-4.
Page 352 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.23.4 FL-Z (Function ID: 495001) at Common Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating FL_EN Off / On - Fault locator enable FL_Dir Forward / Reverse - Metering direction Forward Impeda FL_ImpSet Symmetrical / Matrix - Selection in the setting mode of impedance Symmetrical Line...
Page 353 6F2S1915 (0.46) FL-Z (Function ID: 495001) at Common Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating FL_Line_km 0.0 - 500.0 km Line length (km) 50.0 FL_Line_mile 0.0 - 310.0 Line length (mile) 31.0 FL_AllZone Off / On - Display the outside of the boundary GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 354 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.23.5 Signal monitoring point  FL-Z (Function ID: 495001) Element ID Name Description 8000101349 FLTFLAG Fault locator update flag 3100101348 FLTLOOP Fault loop 3100101005 FLTQUALITY Quality of fault locator Connection point on PLC logic  FL-Z (Function ID: 495001) Element ID Name Description...
Page 355 6F2S1915 (0.46) Autoreclose (ARC) The basic objective of auto-reclosing is to restore automatically the transmission line back into service, after being tripped by line protection relays, without depending on the operator action. The use of auto-reclosing will improve the system stability and reliability. The choice of the auto-reclosing type, such as, one or more reclosing shots, high speed or delayed, single-phase or multi-phase depends on the characteristics of the transmission and protective system together with the utility practice.
Page 356 6F2S1915 (0.46) Outline 2.24.1 Table 2.24-2 summarizes the reclosing operations and the modes in the ARC function. The ARC function can operate for both a single CB arrangement and double CBs (1.5CB) arrangement; hence, the ARC function is grouped into two logics: ARC1 for CB#1 and ARC2 for CB#2.
Page 357 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reclosing modes in 1CB and 1.5CB (ii) Single-phase auto reclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=SPAR) A faulted phase is tripped by relay applications if a single-phase earth fault occurs; then the ARC function tries to recloses the CB. In the case that the phase-to-phase (or multi-phases) fault occurs, the CB is tripped forcibly in three-phases by the instruction of the ARC function regardless of the fault detection of relay application;...
Page 358 6F2S1915 (0.46) (i.e., [ARC-ORDER]=SIMUL). User configurable autoreclose (Setting [ARC1-MODE]=Original) (iii) In the user configurable auto reclose mode (ORIGINAL), the user can manage the scheme of the ARC procedure and it allows the user program the ARC function by the PLC function. Number of reclosing shots (iv) Single-shot autoreclose (Setting [ARC-NUM]=S1 in 1CB)
Page 359 6F2S1915 (0.46) stage, which the ARC issues a three-phase trip command (CB1_94TT or CB2_94TT) for the TRC function; the ARC function abandons to reclose the CB#1 and CB#2 (ARC1 FT or ARC2 FT).  CB is not ready for ARC operation ...
Page 360 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminology 2.24.2 The terminology and signals outlined below are applicable for single CB#1 system. Signals applicable for CB#2 in a two (2) CB system are similar and are not included for clarity. Relay operation period The time interval commencing from the instant of the relay picking-up for the fault current to the instant of the relay dropping-off following the cessation of the fault current.
Page 361 6F2S1915 (0.46) Dead time (Delay timers TTPAR† and TD_MS2–5) (vii) The dead time is the time interval from relay operation i.e. the initiation of the auto-reclose scheme, to the inception of the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ used to energize the circuit breaker closing circuit and is provided by delay timer [TTPAR1].
Page 362 6F2S1915 (0.46) reclose operation of the CB#1. The duration of the setting applied to the [TRESET] timer must be less than the setting applied to the ARC dead time delay timers (e.g. [TTPAR] etc.). Decision time for successful operation or failure (Setting TARCSUC (xi) and signals ‘ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS’, ‘ARC1 CLOSE FAIL’, ‘ARC1 SHOT RS’)
Page 363 6F2S1915 (0.46) Respective signals ‘ARC1-S* IN-PROG’ are defined for the operation of respective shots. A common ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ is also issued. Trigger for the ARC operation (signal ‘ARC_START’) The ‘ARC_START’ signal shows the instant at which ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’ signals are given from the TRC function.
Page 364 6F2S1915 (0.46) Condition logic (Signals ‘ARC1_SPAR_COND’, ‘ARC1_TPAR_COND’) (xv) The ‘Condition’ logic issues the above signals depending on the setting [ARC1 MODE] and the tripped phases (i.e., signal ‘TRIP-ANYPH’ and others). This logic is available when the setting [ARC1 MODE] = SPAR, TPAR, or SPAR&TPAR. GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 365 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function block diagram 2.24.3 The function diagrams for respective modes are illustrated; they represents the general flow of the logic in the ARC1 function. For simplicity, the function block diagrams are represented for CB1 in a 1CB arrangement in Figure 2.24-2, Figure 2.24-3, and Figure 2.24-4; the logics are similar for CB2 in the 1.5CB arrangement except that only a single shot is permitted in the 1.5CB arrangement.
Page 366 6F2S1915 (0.46) SPAR mode Figure 2.24-2 illustrates the ARC function when settings of are performed in both Table 2.24-3 and Table 2.24-4. Table 2.24-3 Block parts in SPAR mode Block parts Corresponding logics Detailed logic ARC1-Mode input Figure 2.24-10 Shot number Figure 2.24-12 Start Figure 2.24-13...
Page 367 6F2S1915 (0.46) To BO 800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ≥1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND 820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC1 BLOCK COM From TRC GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC1 RESET ≥1 Start Multi-phase Trip in SPAR1 GEN.TRIP-A & GEN.TRIP-B & GEN.TRIP-C Condition as to CB#1 To TRC 800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A ARC1 IN-PROG OR TRIP-MPH ARC1 FT 800000EBB1...
Page 368 6F2S1915 (0.46) TPAR mode (ii) Figure 2.24-3 illustrates the ARC function when settings of are performed in both Table 2.24-5 and Table 2.24-6. Table 2.24-5 Block parts in TPAR mode Block parts Corresponding logics Detailed logic ARC1-Mode input Figure 2.24-10 Shot number Figure 2.24-12 Start...
Page 369 6F2S1915 (0.46) To BO 800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ≥1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND 820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC1 BLOCK COM From TRC GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC1 RESET & Start GEN.TRIP-A GEN.TRIP-B GEN.TRIP-C Condition as to CB#1 To TRC 800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A ARC1 IN-PROG OR ARC1 FT 800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B CB1_94TT TRIP-ANYPH TRIP-ANYPH...
Page 370 6F2S1915 (0.46) SPAR and TPAR mode (iii) Figure 2.24-4 illustrates the ARC function when settings of are performed in both Table 2.24-7 and Table 2.24-8. Table 2.24-7 Block parts in SPAR and TPAR mode Block parts Corresponding logics Detailed logic ARC1-Mode input Figure 2.24-10 Shot number...
Page 371 6F2S1915 (0.46) To BO 800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ≥1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND 820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC1 BLOCK COM From TRC GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC1 RESET & Start GEN.TRIP-A GEN.TRIP-B Condition as to CB#1 GEN.TRIP-C 800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A To TRC ARC1 IN-PROG OR ARC1 FT 800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B ARC1 SPAR_COND CB1_94TT TRIP-MPH...
Page 372 6F2S1915 (0.46) Timing diagram 2.24.4 Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault (Shot1 for CB#1 and successful operation in TPAR mode) Figure 2.24-5 illustrates an example for which the single shot scheme has been selected (i.e. [ARCNUM]=S1); an arcing fault is cleared following the operation of the protection relay and the issue of the ‘GEN.TRIP-A/B/C’...
Page 373 6F2S1915 (0.46) Fault current Closed CB#1 Status CB fails to be closed. Open Operated Relay operation Issued GEN.TRIP ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S1 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT1 Dead time [TTPAR1] ARC1-S2 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT2 ARC1-S3 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT3 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND [TCCW1] CB1 ALLPH Closed CLOSE Open...
Page 374 6F2S1915 (0.46) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; fault removed by a backup (iv) Figure 2.24-8 shows the single shot scheme for an Arcing fault, but tripping is not executed due to the failure of the CB#1. Therefore, the operation of the ARC function is reset in the setting time [TRESET] before the duration of dead timer [TTPAR1] expires.
Page 375 6F2S1915 (0.46) Fault current Closed CB#1 Status Open Operated Relay operation Issued GEN.TRIP ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S1 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT1 Dead time [TTPAR1] ARC1-S2 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT2 Dead time [TD_MS2] ARC1-S3 IN-PROG ARC1 SHOT3 Dead time [TD_MS3] ARC1 CLOSE [TCCW1] [TCCW1] [TCCW1] COMMAND Closed...
Page 376 6F2S1915 (0.46) & ≥1 & ≥1 Condition & ARC1-MODE=SPAR ≥1 & ARC1-MODE=TPAR ≥1 & SPAR ARC1-MODE=S&T TPAR ≥1 SPAR&TPAR & MPAR ARC1-MODE=SPAR+S&T ≥1 ARC1-MODE ≥1 ORIGINAL & ARC1-MODE=MPAR ≥1 Start ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF ≥1 800001EBB0 ARC1_MODE-OFF & 810001EBB1 ARC1_MODE-FT & Initiation 820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR ≥1 &...
Page 377 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting logic for ARC2 mode – setting (ARC2-MODE) (ii) The ARC2-MODE input setting is illustrated in Figure 2.24-11. The scheme switch [ARC2- MODE] is provided similar to the [ARC1-MODE]. & ≥1 & & ≥1 & & & ARC2-MODE=SPAR ≥1 &...
Page 378 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting logic for shot number – setting (ARC-NUM) (iii) The [ARC-NUM] switch is provided to set a number of reclosing CB#1. To Initiation for CB#1 & ARC-NUM=S1 ≥1 ARC-NUM=S2 & & ARC-NUM=S3 & ARC-NUM=S4 ARC-NUM & ARC-NUM=S5 From PROT-COMMON CB-SYSTEM=1 CB CB-SYSTEM=2 CB Figure 2.24-12 Shot number...
Page 379 6F2S1915 (0.46) Start logic – setting (FT-3P FAULT) (iv) Start logic generates ‘ARC START’ signal when the TRC function has any ‘GEN.TRIP-A’, ‘-B’, ‘-C’ signals coming from relay functions. The type of tripping (i.e., single-phase-tripping, two- or-three-phase-tripping, or three-phase tripping) is also checked in Start logic. Use PLC connection points ‘EXT.ARC_START-A’...
Page 380 6F2S1915 (0.46) ARC1 and ARC2 functions being generating ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ or ‘ARC2-S1 IN-PROG’ signals. The switch [FT-3P FAULT] requires signals of the external relay; PLC connection points ‘RYOP-A, RYOP-B, and RYOP-C’ are used to get the signals. Note that the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are generated when ‘ARC BLOCK’ signals are injected, provided ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’...
Page 381 6F2S1915 (0.46) Initiation logic – setting (TREADY1, TRESET) Figure 2.24-14 illustrates the initiation logic for CB#1, which has ‘ARC1 READY’ signal issued by the reception of signals ‘ARC1-MODE=ON’ and ‘CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE’. Note that the user should connect a ready signal of the CB with PLC connection point ‘CB1-ARC READY’ using the BI circuit.
Page 382 6F2S1915 (0.46) The ‘CB1-BRIDGE’ signal is used to combine any ‘per-phase trip signal’ into the three- phase trip signal in the TRC function. Thus, the CB will be tripped in three-phases forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A (TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is only generated in the TRC function during the ‘ARC1 UNREADY’...
Page 383 6F2S1915 (0.46) Shot counter- setting (SHOTNUM-TEST) (vi) Figure 2.24-15 illustrates the shot counter logic. Scheme switch [SHOTNUM-TEST] is provided for the shot number test. For example, if two shots are required for the test, set S2 for the [SHOTNUM-TEST]. Table 2.24-9 shows the counting up in the shot counter logic. Note that the ARC function reaches the final trip stage if the counter is over.
Page 384 6F2S1915 (0.46) Condition logic – setting (TEVLV) (vii) The Condition logic determines the reclosing mode of either SPAR or TPAR by detecting the tipped-phases if SPAR, TPAR, or SPAR&TPAR mode is selected. Initiation ARC1-S1 IN-PROG ARC2-S1 IN-PROG SPAR & ARC1_SPAR_COND &...
Page 385 6F2S1915 (0.46) SPAR logic – settings (TSPAR1, TRR1) (viii) The SPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 is illustrated in Figure 2.24-17. The ‘ARC1_SPAR’ signal is generated when the SPAR condition is appeared in the Condition logic; the SPAR logic has the dead timer [TSPAR1] provided to delay issuing a reclose command, which turns into ‘ARC1 SHOT1’...
Page 386 6F2S1915 (0.46) TPAR logic – settings (TTPAR1, TRR1) (ix) The TPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 are illustrated in Figure 2.24-18. To operate in the TPAR mode in the CB#1, the VCHK function provides a permission signal for the TPAR logic. The dead timer [TTPAR1] is required to set in the logic.
Page 387 6F2S1915 (0.46) SPAR+TPAR logic – settings (TSPAR1,TTPAR1,and TRR1) The SPAR&TPAR logic for CB#1 and CB#2 is illustrated in Figure 2.24-17. As for the CB#1, the dead timers [TSPAR1] and [TTPAR1] should be set in the coordination with the [TRR1]. Always ‘1’ From VCHK function ARC1-VCHK Issuing for CB#1...
Page 388 6F2S1915 (0.46) Shot2 to Shot5 for CB#1 –settings (TD_MS2, TRR2 and others) (xi) The ARC1 logic for shot 2-shot5 is illustrated in Figure 2.24-20. Shots 2-5 are applicable for a CB#1 only. For example, two shots (Shot2 and Shot3, i.e., [ARC_NUM]=S3) are required following the Shot1, the user should set the [TS_MS2]/[TS_MS3] and [TRR2]/[TRR3].
Page 389 6F2S1915 (0.46) Issuing close command – setting (TCCW1) (xii) The logic for issuing close command for ARC1 and ARC2 is illustrated in Figure 2.24-21. Shot1–Shot5 for CB#1 Success check for CB#1 ARC1 SHOT1 ARC1 SHOT ARC1 SHOT2 TCCW1 8000011B6C To BO ARC1 SHOT3 ≥1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND...
Page 390 6F2S1915 (0.46) Success check logic – settings (TARCSUC, ARC-SucChk) (xiii) Figure 2.24-22 illustrates the success check logic for CB1 and CB2. Issuing for CB#1 TARCSUC ARC1 SHOT & ARC-SUCCHK=ON Initiation for CB#1 0.10-100.00s ≥1 To TRC ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG 8C00011B71 & CB1_94TT Start ARC1 CLOSE FAIL...
Page 391 6F2S1915 (0.46) Reclosing sequence for two CBs system– setting (ARC-ORDER) (xiv) Figure 2.24-23 shows that the logic determines the reclosing priority between CB#1 and CB#2; the scheme switch [ARC-ORDER] is provided to set the process priority. For example, the user should set CB1 for the [ARC-ORDER] if the CB#1 is being closed firstly.
Page 392 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.24.6 Autoreclose setting (Function ID:441001) Range Default Setting device Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ARC1-EN Off / On - ARC1 scheme switch ARC2-EN Off / On - ARC2 scheme swtich MultiShot-EN Off / On Comm Off / FT / SPAR / ARC1-MODE TPAR / SPAR&TPAR /...
Page 393 6F2S1915 (0.46) Test setting(Function ID: 441001) Range Default Items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating Off / S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 / Function Test SHOTNUM-TEST - ARC test shot number GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 372 -...
Page 394 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.24.7 Signal monitoring point  ARC(Function ID: 4A6001) Element ID Name Description 8500001B6C 3PHASE FAULT 3 phase fault 8000001B81 ARC IN-PROG 8000001BB3 ARC NO ACT No action for ARC 8000011B6C ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND CB close command for ARC1 8C00011B71 ARC1 CLOSE FAIL ARC1 fail...
Page 395 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ARC(Function ID: 4A6001) Element ID Name Description 8100021BB7 ARC2_BLOCK ARC2 block signal 8100021B6F ARC2_INIT ARC2 initiation 8100021BB1 ARC2_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 2 8000021BB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 2 8600021BB6 ARC2_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 2 8400021BB4 ARC2_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 2...
Page 396 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ARC(Function ID: 4A6001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B6D SHOT_1ST 1st shot from Multi shot ARC counter 8100001B6E SHOT_2ND 2ND shot from Multi shot ARC counter 8200001B6F SHOT_3RD 3RD shot from Multi shot ARC counter 8300001B70 SHOT_4TH 4TH shot from Multi shot ARC counter...
Page 397 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  ARC(Function ID: 4A6001) Element ID Name Description 810002EBB7 ARC2_BLOCK ARC2 block signal 810002EBB1 ARC2_MODE-FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 2 800002EBB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF Off mode for autoreclose 2 860002EBB6 ARC2_MODE-ORG Original mode for autoreclose 2 840002EBB4 ARC2_MODE-S&T Single and three-phase mode for autoreclose 2...
Page 398 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  ARC(Function ID: 4A6001) Element ID Name Description 810002EBC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND For three-phase ARC2 condition (sub) 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START For three-phase ARC2 start (sub) (2.69a) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 377 -...
Page 399 6F2S1915 (0.46) Voltage check for autoreclose (VCHK) The voltage-check-for-autoreclose (VCHK) function is used along with the function of autoreclose (ARC), as Bus-bar between Lines requires the restoration of service after the clearance of fault. The ARC covers two breaker systems: single breaker system (1CB) and single-and-a-half breaker system (1.5CB), and the ARC has two scheme logics: one scheme logic (ARC1) is for 1CB and for Bus-bar CB of 1.5CB, and another scheme logic (ARC2) is for Center CB of 1.5CB.
Page 400 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCHK1 for 1CB system 2.25.1 Characteristic and elements VCHK1 does voltage and synchronous check in 1CB system. Four relay elements (OVB, OVB, UVL, and UVL) are used for voltage check. Tow relay elements (OVB and OVL) are used for verification of existing voltage;...
Page 401 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCHK1 and VCHK2 for 1.5CB system 2.25.2 Characteristic and elements VCHK1 and VCHK2 are used for verification of existence or non-existence of voltage on 1.5CB system. As shown in Figure 2.25-3(b), VCHK2 is used in the center CB (CB#2). Four elements (OVL2, UVL2, OVL, and UVL) are configured for VCHK2;...
Page 402 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme for synchronism 2.25.3 VCHK has a measuring function, which checks the difference between a running voltage and an incoming voltage. The measuring function checks phase angles, voltages, and frequencies. The VCHK1 determines the synchronism based on the presence of voltage on both Bus-bar and Line, as shown in Figure 2.25-4(a).
Page 403 6F2S1915 (0.46) SYN1-Angle = phase difference between V B and V L , set by [SYN1-Angle] SYN2-Angle = phase difference between V L2 and V L , set by [SYN2-Angle] SYN1-df = value of frequency difference between Bus-bar and Line, set by [SYN1-df] SYN2-df = value of frequency difference between Line2 and Line, set by [SYN2-df] T_SYN1 =...
Page 404 6F2S1915 (0.46) based on the busbar voltage as shown below: VT ratio at Line VT ratio at busbar whereas, ‘VT ratio at Line’ is obtained from the actual value in VCT ratio setting corresponding with scheme switch [SYN-VLine], and ‘VT ratio at busbar’...
Page 405 6F2S1915 (0.46) where, Δf= Frequency-difference (or cycle-slip in Hertz) Tips: Cycles for the synchronism closure can be calculated: Cycle for synchronism = 1 ∆f[Hz] (2.25-2) ⁄ Time length for getting a synchronism: 2 × Setting [SYN1-Angle] (2.25-3) Time = × 360°...
Page 406 6F2S1915 (0.46) V L : fV L =50.02Hz V B : fV B =50.00Hz time Δf Δf Δf – – Example: |fV B fV L |=|50.00Hz 50.02Hz| = 0.02Hz = 10s SYN1-Angle Synchronism zone Figure 2.25-5 Synchronism between V B and V L when system frequency = 50Hz Note: Settings [SYN2-Angle] and [T_SYN2] are also applicable for these calculations.
Page 407 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCHK1 setting for 1CB system 2.25.4 When the VCHK1 is applied to 1CB system, OVB and UVB check the voltage of a Bus-bar, whereas OVL and UVL check the voltage of Line, as described earlier. The Bus-bar and Line voltages are obtained in the VCT .
Page 408 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting example 1 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-A) Line VCT 1 Line VT (Phase-A) V a (V L1 ) V b (V L2 ) Bus-bar VT (Three Phase) V c (V L3 ) a. Phasor diagram in Line Vs (V3) V s2 (V4) b.
Page 409 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting example 2 (Bus-bar VT=three phases, Line VT=phase-BC) (ii) Line Line VT (Phase B-C) V a (V L1 ) V b (V L2 ) Bus-bar VT (Three Phase) V bc V c (V L3 ) a. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar Vs (V 3 ) b.
Page 410 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting example 3 (Bus-bar VT=Phase-C, Line VT= Three-phase) (iii) Line Line VT (Three phase) V a (V L1 ) V b (V L2 ) Bus-bar VT (Phase C) V c (V L3 ) a. Phasor diagram in line Vs (V3) b.
Page 411 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCHK1 and VCHK2 settings for 1.5CB system 2.25.5 Bus-bar Bus-bar VT (Phase-B) V a (V-L1) Line Line VT V b (V-L2) (Three-phase) V c (V-L3) a. Phasor diagram in Line Line2 V s (V3) Line2 VT (Phase-B) b. Phasor diagram in Bus V s2 (V4) V s2 c.
Page 412 6F2S1915 (0.46) When VCHK1 and VCHK2 are used in 1.5CB system, set the scheme switches [SYN- VBus], [SYN-VLine], and [SYN-VLine2]. For example, the settings in Figure 2.25-9 are applied when VCHK 1 and VCHK2 are applied in the 1.5CB system. Table 2.25-10 Setting example for 1.5CB system Output voltage Bus-bar VT=...
Page 413 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme and activation 2.25.6 VCHK1 and VCHK2 provide output signals to the ARC with results of voltage check and synchronism check as described earlier. The energizing control scheme of VCHK1 is drawn in Figure 2.25-10, the output signal ARC1-VCHK is fed to ARC1 when one or more of the following conditions are established: (1) the VCHK1 runs, (2) the OVB and the UVL run, or (3) the UVB and the OVL run.
Page 414 6F2S1915 (0.46) T_LL2_DL OVL2 8200021B60 OVL2 8024001001 & & 8100021B23 0.01-100.00S ≥1 ARC2-VCHK ARC2-LL2_DL 8000021B61 T_DL2_LL UVL2 8124011001 & & 0.01-100.00S ARC2-DL2_LL T_DL2_DL 8200021B6A & & 0.01-100.00S ARC2-DL2_DL 8300021B6B OVL2 T_SYN2 8300021B6C & & 0.01-100.00S ARC2-SYN2 8400021B62 SYN2-dƟ ARC2-NOVCHK 8500021B63 SYN2-dV 8600021B64 SYN2-df...
Page 415 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.25.7 VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001) at Autoreclose Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ARC1-VCHK- Off / On - VCHK1 scheme switch ARC2-VCHK- Off / On - VCHK2 scheme switch ARC1 Voltage V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3 / V- check L12 / V-L23 / V-L31 / SYN-Vbus...
Page 416 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001) at Autoreclose Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating ARC2- Off / On - Voltage check is not applied to ARC2 NOVCHK T_LL2_DL 0.01 - 100.00 s Voltage check time Live-Line2 and Dead-Line 0.05 T_DL2_LL 0.01 - 100.00...
Page 417 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.25.8 Signal monitoring point  VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001) Element ID Name Description 8000011B23 ARC1-VCHK Voltage check for autoreclose 1 8100021B23 ARC2-VCHK Voltage check for autoreclose 2 8200011B62 OVB relay element operated 8300011B60 OVL relay element operated 8C00011B67 OVL-L1 OVL relay element operated (phase-L1)
Page 418 6F2S1915 (0.46) Trip circuit (TRC) The trip circuit (TRC) scheme issues trip commands to the circuit breakers (CB#1, CB#2) when it receives trip signals from the protection functions (which are identified with ‘FC9’, etc. to represent ZS relay, etc.). The TRC function is able to receive an alternate trip signal generated by an additional relay external to the IED using PLC connection points via the binary IO module (BIO)†.
Page 419 6F2S1915 (0.46) Collection: The signals, received from the various protection functions (shown as ‘FC18’ and others; see Table 2.26-2 and Table 2.26-6), are gathered in the Trip-signal collection logic. Generation: CB trip signal generation, Sub-signal generation for blocking ARC§, and Alarm-signal generation logics are provided.
Page 420 6F2S1915 (0.46) Protection functions TRC function FC1-OPT-TRIP-A FC1-OPT-TRIP-B FC1-OPT-TRIP-C FC1-OPT-TRIP Binary IO module FC1-ARC-BLOCK FC1-OPT-ALARM TRIP-COMMAND1-A CB#1 (bus CB) FC1-OPT-AR TRIP-COMMAND1-B Transmission line FC1-OPT-BR OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND1-C FC1-OPT-CR OPT-TRIP-B CB trip TRIP-COMMAND2-A FC1-OPT-ABR OPT-TRIP-C CB#2 (center CB) signal FC1-OPT-BCR TRIP-COMMAND2-B Trip-command generation FC1-OPT-CAR Transmission line...
Page 421 6F2S1915 (0.46) Command for tripping CB and signal to block reclosing CB#1/CB#2 2.26.1 The TRC logic is designed to issue per-phase trip or three-phase trip commands when a fault occurs. Table 2.26-2 shows the receipt of trip signals from the protection functions, which are identified by ‘Protection function identification numbers (‘...
Page 422 6F2S1915 (0.46) TRC function. ‘FC*_OPT_TRIP’ represents a three-pole trip command. ‘ARC- BLOCK’ represents a signal used to block the operation of the ARC function; the ‘ARC-BLOCK’ signal is transferred to the autoreclose function (ARC). Incidentally, the term ‘FC*’ represents one of the relay elements connected to the TRC function. Table 2.26-3 and Table 2.26-4 summarize the operation results in the TRC function.
Page 423 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 2.26-4 Trip commands Outputs Inputs [TP-MODE]= 1- [TP-MODE]= 3- [TP-MODE]= (see Table 2.26-3) PHASE† PHASE‡ PER-PHASE TRIP-COMMAND1-A TRIP-COMMAND1-A FC*_OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND2-A TRIP-COMMAND2-A TRIP-COMMAND1-B TRIP-COMMAND1-B FC*_OPT-TRIP-B TRIP-COMMAND2-B TRIP-COMMAND2-B TRIP-COMMAND1-C TRIP-COMMAND1-C FC*_OPT-TRIP-C TRIP-COMMAND2-C TRIP-COMMAND2-C TRIP-COMMAND1-A FC*_OPT-TRIP-A TRIP-COMMAND1-B FC*_OPT-TRIP-B TRIP-COMMAND2-A TRIP-COMMAND1-A TRIP-COMMAND2-B TRIP-COMMAND1-B TRIP-COMMAND1-B...
Page 424 6F2S1915 (0.46) Recording identifiers for respective fault types 2.26.2 Table 2.26-6 shows an identifier signal for the recording function generated when a fault is detected by the protection functions. That is, the identifier is generated in each protection function (relay element) and is transferred to the recording function. Table 2.26-6 Recording identifiers for relay operating elements for different faults Fault identifier for relay element operated in each phase Protection...
Page 425 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.26.3 Trip-signal collection Trip-signal collection gathers the trip signals provided by each protection function and groups them to the trip operation commands “OPT-TRIP”, “OPT-TRIP-A”, “OPT-TRIP-B”, and “OPT- TRIP-C” for General-trip-signal production, as shown in Figure 2.26-2. The TRC logic has PLC connection points, which the user can program for issuing the trip command.
Page 426 6F2S1915 (0.46) functions, the scheme switch [TP-MODE] is useless. The “GEN.TRIP-A,-B,-C” signals are transferred to the ARC function to initiate the reclose operation of the CBs. To ARC 8200001BB2 GEN.TRIP-A GEN.TRIP-B 820000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM GEN.TRIP-C To ZG Trip-command ≥1 collection scheme GEN.TRIP OPT-TRIP-A ≥1...
Page 427 6F2S1915 (0.46) Provision of trigger signals to Recording functions The ‘TRIP COMMMAND1-A, -B, -C’ and ‘TRIP COMMMAND2-A, -B, -C’ signals are viable to Recording function operation of Recording function, which we shall see in Chapter Provision for distance relay The ‘GEN.TRIP’ signal is provided to direct the operation of the UVPWI relay in the distance Relay application: Distance protection protection function, which we shall see in Chapter CB trip signal production...
Page 428 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8500001B65 Protection functions FC*-ARC-BLOCK FC01 To ARC function ≥1 8500001B79 FC02 GEN.ARC-BLOCK ≥1 FC40 From CBF function CBF1 CBF1-ARC-BLOCK CBF2 CBF2-ARC-BLOCK Figure 2.26-4 Scheme logic for Sub-signal generation Alarm-signal generation Figure 2.26-5 shows the alarm-signal generation logic. The signals in Table 2.26-6 are collected and grouped into OPT.PHASE-A, OPT.PHASE-B, OPT.PHASE-C, OPT.PHASE-N, and GEN.TRIP_ALARM signals.
Page 429 6F2S1915 (0.46) When an alarm signal indicating a Line-to-Line (LL) fault and others is provided externally, the user can also record it as the alarm by the use of PLC connection points ‘OPT.P- A_ADD’ and others. If the additional relay being designed to operate for a ground fault is available, use the alternative PLC connection point ‘OPT.P-N_ADD’.
Page 430 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.26.4 TRC(Function ID: 4A0001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating 1-Phase / 3-Phase / Per- TP-MODE - Trip mode selection Per-Phase Phase GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 409 -...
Page 431 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.26.5 Signal monitoring point  TRC(Function ID: 4A0001) Element ID Name Description 8100001BB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command 8200001BB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command 8400001B64 GEN.ALARM operation (GEN.ALARM) 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP General trip 8000001B6C GEN.TRIP-A General trip (Phase-A) 8100001B6D GEN.TRIP-B General trip (Phase-B) 8200001B6E...
Page 432 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  TRC(Function ID: 4A0001) Element ID Name Description 810000EBB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command 820000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command 840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Additional alarm output command 8C0000EBBB OPT.P-AB_ADD Additional operated phase-AB command 880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command 8D0000EBBC OPT.P-BC_ADD Additional operated phase-BC command...
Page 433 6F2S1915 (0.46) Protection common (PROT_COMMON) The contact states of the circuit breaker (CB) and the disconnector (DS) provided are grouped in the protection common function (PROT_COMMON) and are used in a number of relay applications to decide conditions. The PROT_COMMON function also examines whether a line is dead (de-energizing), as the PROT_COMMON has an under-voltage detection (UV) relay.
Page 434 6F2S1915 (0.46) Selection of breaker system 2.27.1 A single breaker arrangement (1CB) is applied and the protection function is required to operate in the 1CB, the user should set 1CB for the scheme switch [CB-System]. When a single- and-a-half breaker arrangement system (1.5CB) is applied, the user should set 2CB for the scheme switch.
Page 435 6F2S1915 (0.46) supervision feature is required; set the time for the setting [TCBSV] to define the monitoring period, which the user can have an option among 0 to 100 sec. CB decision logic (iii) Figure 2.27-1 shows the decision logic of the PROT_COMMON and outputs the decision state of the CB: CB-A_CLOSE, CB-B_CLOSE, and others.
Page 436 6F2S1915 (0.46) 8000001BB0 ≥1 TCBSV 8300001BBE 8000001B93 8000001B87 & CB1-A_FAIL ≥1 8300001BBF 0–100S 8100001BB1 ≥1 TCBSV 8300001BBE 8100001B94 8100001B88 & ≥1 CB1-B_FAIL 8300001BBF 0–100S 8200001BB2 ≥1 8300001BBE TCBSV 8200001B95 8200001B89 & ≥1 CB1-C_FAIL 8300001BBF 8300001B96 0–100S ≥1 & CB1-FAIL To Common of DISCAR, DEFCAR 800000EBB0 CB1-A_NO_CONT &...
Page 437 6F2S1915 (0.46) Decision of DS open/close status 2.27.3 The PROT_COMMON function can determine the behavior and position status of a DS. Signal configuration and settings for the DS position status are similar to that of the CB. Note that settings and logics cited below are just available for the DS. Signal selection Set either NO, NC, or Both for scheme switch [DS-Contact].
Page 438 6F2S1915 (0.46) Dead line detection 2.27.4 The dead line detection (DLD) determinates whether the line is out-of-service or not. Checking for the voltage existence in three-phase is required when all CBs are closed; hence, the output signal of the DLD is being checked. (2.84.3) Under-voltage relay A phase-to-phase (UVLS) element and a phase-to-ground (UVLG) element are provide in the...
Page 439 6F2S1915 (0.46) Detection of current change (OCD) 2.27.5 Current change detection relay Suppose that the difference exists between the latest current vector (I ) and the last current vector (I ). The OCD function will operate if the difference is larger than the setting. The I measured for the last two-cycles;...
Page 440 6F2S1915 (0.46) User logic switches 2.27.6 PROT_COMMON function has four general-purpose switches; they are ready for the user’s PLC logic. For example, the user can select a mode using [UserLogicSW1] when the PLC#1 logic operates in S1 mode (Purposes: the user can select one of modes in accordance with the time, location, condition, etc.).
Page 441 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.27.7 PROT_COMMON (Function ID: 48A001) Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating UVLS 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-phase relay operating value 77.0 UVLG 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-ground relay operating value 45.0 0.05 - 0.25 -...
Page 442 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.27.8 Signal monitoring point  PROT_COMMON(48A001) Element ID Name Description 8000001B88 CB-A_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-A of CB1 and CB2 8400001B8C CB-A_OPEN Main contact opening in phase-A of CB1 and CB2 8100001B89 CB-B_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-B of CB1 and CB2 8500001B8D CB-B_OPEN Main contact opening in phase-B of CB1 and CB2...
Page 443 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  PROT_COMMON(48A001) Element ID Name Description 8700001B9A CB2_FAIL States of the CB2 not to be defined in three-phase 8300001B8B CB_ALLPH_CLOSE Three-phase contacts closed in CB 8700001B8F CB_ALLPH_OPEN Three-phase contacts not closed in CB 8800001B90 CB_ANYPH_CLOSE Any one of three-phase contacts closed in CB 8900001B91 CB_LOSS_PHASE...
Page 444 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection point in PLC logic  PROT_COMMON (48A001) Element ID Name Description 860000EBBC CB2-C_NC_CONT CB2-C normally close contact 860000EBB5 CB2-C_NO_CONT CB2-C normally open contact 8C0000EBBD DS_NC_CONT DS normally close contact 8C0000EBB6 DS_NO_CONT DS normally open contact Mapping points in IEC 61850 ...
Page 445 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cold load protection (CLP) The function of cold load protection (CLP) can have a number of disparate groups for setting. The CLP can switch a group setting from one operation to another operation at which protection functions in the IED are required to shift their settings from steady state to particular state.
Page 446 6F2S1915 (0.46) Scheme logic 2.28.1 State transition diagram and scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.28-1 and Figure 2.28-2. It should be noted that the scheme logic requires two binary inputs: circuit breaker (CB) OPEN and circuit breaker (CB) CLOSED. Under the normal operation, where the CB is closed, the CLP stays in STATE 0, and the OC operates with a normal setting group.
Page 447 6F2S1915 (0.46) STATE 0 CB status: Closed Settings: Normal Monitor CB status CB opens CB closes within T CLE time STATE 1 CB status: Open Settings: Normal Run T CLE timer <ICLDO for Monitor CB status T CLR timer T CLDO time expires T CLE timer expires...
Page 448 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 2.28.2 CLP(Function ID: 481001) at Common Range Default Setting items Contents Unit Note 1A rating 5A rating CLP-EN Off / On - Cold load protection scheme switch Group1 / Group2 / Group3 / Group4 / CLP-SG - Applied setting group at cold load mode Group1 Group5 / Group6 / Group7 / Group8...
Page 449 6F2S1915 (0.46) Data ID 2.28.3 PLC monitoring point  CLP(Function ID: 481001) Element ID Name Description 8000001C20 OCCLP-A OCCLP relay element operated (phase-A) 8100001C21 OCCLP-B OCCLP relay element operated (phase-B) 8200001C22 OCCLP-C OCCLP relay element operated (phase-C) 8000001B60 CLP STATE0 The scheme is in STATE0 8100001B61 CLP STATE1...
Page 450 6F2S1915 (0.46) General control function Contents Pages Pages Common controls (CMNCTRL) LED reset function (LEDR) Control hierarchy Local control Control level and control point Mode control function (MDCTRL) Control right Select-before-operation mode (SBO) Control scheme PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signals Counter function for the general (GCNT) Programmable logic control (PLC) Direct-operation mode (DIR) Remote control...
Page 451 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control scheme Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages: “Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”, “Cancel”, and “Operate”...
Page 452 6F2S1915 (0.46) Command reception in SBO mode In the SBO receiving stage shown in Figure 3.1-1 we can find three processes: select, cancel, and operate command flows. Reception of “select command” Figure 3.1-2 shows a schematic process flow diagram when receiving a “select command” following the “Wait for a command”.
Page 453 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Receiving “Cancel command” Success Return to “Wait Discarding of Cancel logic When Cancel is issued “select command” for a command” “Remote-cancel” from the remote-end Failed When Cancel is issued Do nothing Cancel logic “Local-cancel” from the local-end Figure 3.1-3 Scheme “Cancel command”...
Page 454 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control mode Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode. Select-before-operation mode (SBO) 3.2.1 The user should be aware that in the SBO mode a signal is returned from the target device in the form of a response signal, (answer).
Page 455 6F2S1915 (0.46) Process Server IE D (Control function) Target device (SAS) SBOw Selection Command Answer Response Oper. Operation Command Answer Response Figure 3.2-2 SBO with normal security Direct-operation mode (DIR) 3.2.2 In the DIR mode, a target device is controlled without the reception of the select command. An enhanced security mode (DOes) is also provided when the user wishes to control a device with additional security rather than the normal level of security experienced with mode (DOns) .
Page 456 6F2S1915 (0.46) IE D Process (Server) Control function Target device Operation Control Command Answer#1 Response Figure 3.2-4 Direct control with normal security GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 435 -...
Page 457 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control hierarchy It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and ‘control- hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of the control and monitoring applications in the sub-station automation system (SAS) and the sub-station control and monitoring system (SCMS).
Page 458 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control level and control point 3.3.1 As shown in Figure 3.3-1, the control hierarchy is distributed across three levels; the network level having a remote-control center (RCC); the station level having operator and engineering work stations (OWS/EWS); and the bay level† having an IED equipped with an LCD screen. One of the three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and LCD) is available to issue a control- command.
Page 459 6F2S1915 (0.46) ○ ○ 2 Distribution of the control-right 1 Checking the bay level RemoteLocalKey_43BCU From LOCMT DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL SPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT LRSW01_LR_ST DOUT_BOOL DTYPE (530001 3109001001) DTYPE To SPOS01 510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select condition logic SPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate DOUT_BOOL condition logic DTYPE To SPOS02 510001 820102ED50 SPOS02IN_TMP_28...
Page 460 6F2S1915 (0.46) Common controls (CMNCTRL) The CMNCTRL function consists of two parts. The former part (CMNCTRL1) is used to prevent double-commands, which are forbidden, by the use of select-states for the respective control functions. The latter part (CMNCTRL2) is served as a mediator to provide a bridge between functions.
Page 461 6F2S1915 (0.46) Double command blocking (DCB) 3.4.1 For control functions, the operating principle is that priority is given to the first command received and shall be executed first. In other words, successive commands received do not have the right to run until the first command received has failed to complete its operation (that is, the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established).
Page 462 6F2S1915 (0.46) Automatic sequence controlling function In Figure 3.4-1, the CMNCTRL1 function generates a message denoted with the number 1; Figure 3.4-2 exemplifies that the IED-1 generates the “stVal” message 1. In addition, IEDs- 2 to -10 are also required to receive message 1, this is denoted with the number 2. For IEC61850 communication, the “stVal”...
Page 463 SCS_ORIDENT 5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM †Note: The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba. Miscellaneous settings 3.4.4 The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings: 1. Control direction: The [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the SPOS, DPOS and TPOS functions.
Page 464 6F2S1915 (0.46) incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set with [CNTRV]. 3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time limit, the selection is canceled.
Page 465 6F2S1915 (0.46) CMNCTRL (FunctionID:5A0001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SDCEN Off / On - Setting of the control to the same direction CNTRV 0 - 1 - Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX] level 30 - 300 - Selection cancel time-out timer EXEWAIT 30 - 300 - Waiting execute operation time-out timer...
Page 466 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 3.4.6 PLC connection points  CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001) Element ID Name Description 800800EDE1 ADD_DCB_SND Additional condition for double command blocking 800800EFB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL_IN 800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1 800800EF41 PLC_I_002 PLC event information 2 800800EF42 PLC_I_003 PLC event information 3 800800EF43 PLC_I_004...
Page 467 6F2S1915 (0.46) PLC monitoring point  CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001) Element ID Name Description 0008001FB3 PLC_O_100 PLC event output 100 PLC connection points  CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101) Element ID Name Description 320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal1 320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal2 320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal3...
Page 468 6F2S1915 (0.46) PLC connection points  CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101) Element ID Name Description 000012EF42 PLC_BOOL_13 PLC event bool information 13 000013EF42 PLC_BOOL_14 PLC event bool information 14 000014EF42 PLC_BOOL_15 PLC event bool information 15 320014EF43 PLC_UINT32_15 PLC event uint32 information 15 320015EF43 PLC_UINT32_16 PLC event uint32 information 16...
Page 469 6F2S1915 (0.46) PLC monitoring point  CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101) Element ID Name Description 0000111F42 PLC_O_BOOL_12 PLC event bool output 12 0000121F42 PLC_O_BOOL_13 PLC event bool output 13 0000131F42 PLC_O_BOOL_14 PLC event bool output 14 0000141F42 PLC_O_BOOL_15 PLC event bool output 15 8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1...
Page 470 6F2S1915 (0.46) Local, remote and PLC control The user can select either local or remote control by pressing the L │ R key on the front panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC connection points.
Page 471 6F2S1915 (0.46) Local control 3.5.1 Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user. Remote control 3.5.2 Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server. Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
Page 472 6F2S1915 (0.46) DPOS ASEQ SPOS User’s PLC User’s PLC logic logic PLC connection point PLC monitoring point Figure 3.5-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in the DIR mode.
Page 473 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 3.5.5 Signal monitoring points  LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001) Element ID Name Description 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT S43BCU state for SAS Connection points in PLC logic  LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001) Element ID Name Description 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1(PLC use)
Page 474 6F2S1915 (0.46) LED reset function (LEDR) A number of LEDs are lined on the IED front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is lit when a tripping command is issued for the CB. “TRIP” LED is being illuminated until the user can confirm the tripped CB;...
Page 475 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select logic for resetting LEDs 3.6.1 The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 3.6-1 shows selection logic in the LEDR function. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic Cancel logic Cancel command...
Page 476 6F2S1915 (0.46) and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function *Note: The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a “ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus, mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication. Output signal required mapping (ii) The LEDR function can...
Page 477 6F2S1915 (0.46) detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-2. Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a command is not identical to the “IED test status”. Note: The user needs to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic using the connection point “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”.
Page 478 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic in SBO mode 3.6.2 In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 479 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode 3.6.3 Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs. Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic LED resetting by the remote-end Success...
Page 480 6F2S1915 (0.46) †Note: Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs, by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See section 3.6.4 for how to connect. Operate condition (iii) Figure 3.6-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine a reset-condition for the operation.
Page 481 6F2S1915 (0.46) monitoring application: Control hierarchy . “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is provided in Table 3.6-3. Settings in LED logics 3.6.4 The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic has a timer and a setting;...
Page 482 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.6.5 The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 483 6F2S1915 (0.46) SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)  †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 3.6-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 3.6-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0.
Page 484 6F2S1915 (0.46) are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication Table 3.6-5 Mapping signals for SPC object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs Quality 3010013110041005...
Page 485 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 3.6-6 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Timestamp Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel...
Page 486 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 3.6.6 Reset Control (Function ID: 528001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note LEDDR1-EN Off / On LEDR01 Reset Control Enable GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 465 -...
Page 487 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 3.6.7 Signal monitoring points  TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001) Element ID Name Description 8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD The controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld) 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD LEDR reset command output 8007011D57 LEDR01_EC Execute command 8007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
Page 488 6F2S1915 (0.46) Counter function for the general (GCNT) When a signal is generated externally and the signal is received by generic counter function (GCNT), the GCNT function can count their signal transitions. Figure 3.7-1 shows signals are generated repeatedly. For example, if the number of generated signals should be reported, the GCNT function counts the number of the signal transitions;...
Page 489 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32†...
Page 490 6F2S1915 (0.46) CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number from 9 to 2147483647. Setting the initial-value (iii) The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value; generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted from either “0 (or 1)”...
Page 491 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select logics for SBO/DIR modes 3.7.2 The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting. Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end Figure 3.7-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 492 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001) Command “Remote-Reset-Control” For SBO operation 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command 1≥ & & To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 493 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select condition (ii) Figure 3.7-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. The GCNT01 function checks the condition for the select command using the signal “S4301_STATE” and other signals. When resetting the counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†, the user should set On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
Page 494 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal name and number (iii) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 495 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 540001 000E041D91 GCNT04_TMP_01 GCNT04 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS … … … 540001 000E201D91 GCNT32_TMP_01 GCNT32 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS Setting names (iv) Table 3.7-7 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32 Setting Name Description Default...
Page 496 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 3.7.3 In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 497 6F2S1915 (0.46) a command is not identical to the “IED test status”. Signal name and number (ii) Table 3.7-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal 540001 840E021E95 GCNT02_CC_SSCN GCNT02 cancel success signal 540001 840E031E95...
Page 498 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 3.7.4 After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters. Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end Figure 3.7-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 499 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Operate command Reset from the remote-end Select command Success Operation Reset from the Operate logic Signal output Signal reception decision remote-end in the IEC61850 Do nothing Failed Operate command Reset from the local-end Success Operation...
Page 500 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select condition (iii) Similar to the select condition (see sec.3.7.2(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate-condition logic. Figure 3.7-14 shows the operate-condition logic. From SOTFSW*1 GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) Command blocking*1(S4301 defines ”Blocked”) To operate logic S4301_STATE Operate condition 1≥...
Page 501 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.7.5 The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 502 6F2S1915 (0.46) Defining SBO mode Figure 3.7-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS: SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld ...
Page 503 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping output data (ii) The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 3.7-18 illustrates how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to map the IEC 61850 communications.
Page 504 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 3.7-11 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO...
Page 505 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 3.7.6 Counter (Function ID: 540001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note GCNT01-EN Off / On - Switch for counter01 GCNT02-EN Off / On - Switch for counter02 GCNT03-EN Off / On - Switch for counter03 …. ….
Page 506 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 3.7.7 Signal monitoring points in GCNT01  GCNT (Function ID: 540001) Element ID Name Description 000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize 800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD 800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI) 800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC...
Page 507 6F2S1915 (0.46) “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” by using the following steps: Step 1 Find the element ID for GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN (i.e., “890E011EA2”) Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”) Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for the 2 device) Step 4...
Page 508 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mode control function (MDCTRL) For the user, mode control (MDCTRL) function can provide test function (TEST-FB) interface, which is a command to change the mode in the function. MDCTRL function consists of two parts: (1) On-mode or Test-mode sensing in IED and (2) interface between IED and SAS. ─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────...
Page 509 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function 3.8.1 Mode sensor The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED. To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to operation.
Page 510 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 3.8.2 The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps, Step1: Editing Logical Node Step2: Mapping output data Step3: Mapping input data Editing Logical Node The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function.
Page 511 6F2S1915 (0.46) SBOw Oper Cancel Origin stSeld sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”) ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” ) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 3.8-2 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 3.8-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the MDCTRL01 function.
Page 512 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 3.8-4 Mapping signals for MOD object. Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT Drag and drop Figure 3.8-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO Mapping input data (iii) The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel.
Page 513 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 3.8-5 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Timestamp System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum...
Page 514 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 3.8.3 MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for Mode change operation MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer !Note: The user can set an item on Test sub-menu (see Chapter Communication and maintenance: Test operations User interface: Test sub-menu...
Page 515 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 3.8.4 Signal monitoring point  MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001) Element ID Name Description 8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI) 8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC 8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote 2013011001 MDCTRL01_MODE MDCTRL01 mode 8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
Page 516 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001) Element ID Name Description 8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal 8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal 8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40 8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41...
Page 517 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control and monitoring application Contents Pages Pages Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) Operating time reset (OPTIM) Double pos. control with SYNDIF (DPSY) Single position control (SPOS) Double position control (DPOS) Switch control by software (SOFTSW) Event detection using BIs (GENBI) Synch check for difference (SYNDIF) Interlock with software (ILK) Three position control (TPOS)
Page 518 6F2S1915 (0.46) Single position device function (SPOS) The single position device function (SPOS) is used when the user wishes to control a device from On or Off state. When a select command is provided for the IED, the SPOS function can issue a control command if the SPOS function obtains the response from the device.
Page 519 6F2S1915 (0.46) Selection logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.1.1 The user should set scheme switch [SPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to SPOS01 operation. Table 4.1-10 shows all of the scheme switches in the SPOS function. Receiving “select command ON” from the remote-end Figure 4.1-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’...
Page 520 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Input Selection logic in SPOS01 Output SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001) Command “Remote-On-Control” For SBO operation 510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 521 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “select command Off” from the remote-end (ii) Figure 4.1-3 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the remote- end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from remote-end Failed...
Page 522 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal to BO The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Select command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote- OFF-Control”...
Page 523 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Select logic in SPOS01 Output SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001) For SBO operation Select command Command “Local-On-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & To “Wait for a next For DIR operation command” To BO connection Operate command with ILK†...
Page 524 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Off” from the local-end (iv) Figure 4.1-7 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Selection logics Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 525 6F2S1915 (0.46) ‡Note: A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more information, see Figure 4.1-13. §Note: An Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation.
Page 526 6F2S1915 (0.46) when the interlock check is required in the select logic, use the connection point (PLC#1;e.g., DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, use the connection point (PLC#2); e.g., DEV01_CL_COMMAND”. PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in 510001 7001016D08 Table 4.1-2.
Page 527 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Off” by PLC function (vi) Figure 4.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Selection logics Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from remote-end Select command Off from remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 528 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in SPOS01 Output SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001) 1≥ & OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation (PLC#1 connection point) Operate command with To BO connection 510001 800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK ILK† condition &...
Page 529 6F2S1915 (0.46) 2. Set the scheme switch [SPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixed logic. How to replace the original logic If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic completely, the user can replace it using the PLC connection point “User configurable condition”. Connect the user-customized logic using SPOS01IN_TMP_32, which is listed as PLC#2 in Table 4.1-7.
Page 530 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED includes a relay application, the trip command is issued at the output point “GEN.TRIP” in Table 4.1-6.
Page 531 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 800103EE33 DEV03_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS03 PLC On-control checking with interlock …. …. …. 510001 800114EE33 DEV20_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS20 PLC On-control checking with interlock Table 4.1-3 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘Off’) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 800101EE31...
Page 532 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.1-7 PLC connection points (Input signal for select condition logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition (PLC#1) 510001 800102EE61 SPOS02IN_TMP_31 SPOS02 additional failure condition (PLC#1) 510001 800103EE61 SPOS03IN_TMP_31 SPOS03 additional failure condition (PLC#1) ….
Page 533 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting names (ix) Note: The “xx” of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if the SPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from “01” to “20”.) Table 4.1-10 Setting of SBO control in SPOSxx Setting Name Description Default...
Page 534 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.1.2 In SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; the function can discard the select command when the cancel conditions are satisfied; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., waiting state “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 535 6F2S1915 (0.46) is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_FS” if the SPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true. Receiving “Cancel” from the local-end (ii) Figure 4.1-16 outlines the reception of the cancel command from the local end. Wait for a command Select logics Wait for a next command...
Page 536 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel condition logic (iii) Figure 4.1-18 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria, “unmatched condition detected” is connected normally for the cancel logic, set Fixlogic for the scheme switch [SPOS01_LGCNFFC]. SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001) To cancel logic in Unmatched condition detected *1 1≥...
Page 537 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 8601021E95 SPOS02_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS02 510001 8601031E95 SPOS03_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS03 … … … 510001 8601141E95 SPOS20_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS20 510001 8701011E96 SPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS01 510001 8701021E96 SPOS02_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS02 510001 8701031E96...
Page 538 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.1.3 Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic start to control the device. Receiving “operate command On” from the remote- end Figure 4.1-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote- end. Wait for a command Select logics Wait for a next command...
Page 539 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in SPOS01 Output SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001) “ SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF” (510001_8001011E7F) Command “Remote-On-Control” [SPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ & with ILK condition 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd. † without ILK condition ILK†...
Page 540 6F2S1915 (0.46) §§Note: The “SPOS01_OEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point # 2 “user-configurable condition”.
Page 541 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “operate command Off” from the remote end (ii) Figure 4.1-21 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select logics Wait for a next command Select command On from remote-end On control from remote-end Off control from remote-end Success...
Page 542 6F2S1915 (0.46) ‡Note: An “operate condition” is generated in the operate-condition logic( see Figure 4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch[SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an alternative “Operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The alternative ”Operate-condition”...
Page 543 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end Success Select command On from the local-end Operation...
Page 544 6F2S1915 (0.46) ‡Note: An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic( see Figure 4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an alternative “Operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The alternative ”Operate-condition”...
Page 545 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “operate command Off” from the local-end (iv) Figure 4.1-25 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end...
Page 546 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in SPOS01 Output SPOS1 function (Function ID: 510001) “ SPOS01-FEC_OK_CSF” (510001_8001011E7F) Operate Cmd. [SPOS01-CPW] † Command “Remote-Off-Control” with ILK condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd. † without ILK condition ILK†...
Page 547 6F2S1915 (0.46) user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point # 2 “user- configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01- LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”. Output signal to BO The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-26, can issue a signal “Operate”...
Page 548 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “operate command Off” using PLC logic (vi) Figure 4.1-28 outlines the reception of the operate command for Off using the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end...
Page 549 6F2S1915 (0.46) 4.1-17. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic. Replacing the original logic If the user wishes to replace the operate condition logic completely, it can be achieved using PLC connection point “User configurable condition”: Connect the user-customized logic using “SPOS01IN_TMP_41”, listed as PLC#2 in Table 4.1-17.
Page 550 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control and monitoring application: Software switch information, see Chapter controller. See the signal “CBK_STATE in Table 4.1-6. Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are changing the status of one or more devices.
Page 551 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description …. …. …. 510001 830114EE5B SPOS20IN_TMP_38 SPOS20 user configurable condition(PLC#1) Table 4.1-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 user configurable condition) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) 510001 810102EDDA SPOS02IN_TMP_42 SPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#2)
Page 552 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.1-19 PLC monitoring points (signals with in operate logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command 510001 8101021E82 SPOS02_OEC_OK_CS SPOS02 on direction execute command 510001 8101031E82 SPOS03_OEC_OK_CS SPOS03 on direction execute command …...
Page 553 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setup for BIO module 4.1.4 The user should connect the SPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits; subsequently, the SPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should execute the following four steps below. BI connection for status-signals BO connection for “Select command On/Off”...
Page 554 6F2S1915 (0.46) in the event suppression detector. Event suppression If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the SPOS function will receive iterative signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the SPOS function; hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
Page 555 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminal and Selection logic in SPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire “ ” SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG (510001_8501011F76) “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” “ ” Select command in Signal designated by Select 200B01_8002001112) ≥1 SPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] command 1≥ On/Off DRIVER [Input signal 2] “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”...
Page 556 6F2S1915 (0.46) Contact health check (iv) The SPOS01 function has contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user is able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGXFEOT]†. Consequently, the SPOS01 function can determine whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO.
Page 557 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate-Off command check Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD]. Operate logic in SPOS01 Contact health check “ ” SPOS01_FEX_BO logic in SPOS01 “510001_8101011DD0” Result of contact health check & BO3 circuit at IO_#1 “...
Page 558 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 4.1-38 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings are implemented incorrectly, as shown in Table 4.1-23. BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is actually chosen. In this case, the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD] is meaningless; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
Page 559 6F2S1915 (0.46) BIO module 43SW Remote/Local end “ ” Plus (+) SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG SW1 is not driven with Plus (+) (510001_8501011F76) any BO1 SW 1 Select command Physical BO is ON/OFF virtualized. “ ” SPOS01_OEX_BO (510001_8201011DD3) SW2 is driven with BO2 at IO#1 Operate-On SW 2 command...
Page 560 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 8101141DD0 SPOS20_FEX_BO SPOS20 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output. Setting names Note: The “xx” of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if the SPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from “01”...
Page 561 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 4.1.5 The user can operate the SPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SPOS function is designed for the class of “Single Point Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below, Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 562 6F2S1915 (0.46)  SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” ) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 4.1-41 LN editing screen for SBO (for example) Defining DIR setting mode Figure 4.1-42 exemplifies the SPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO1501”.
Page 563 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.1-30 Mapping signals for SPCSO object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory 510001 3001011008 SPOS01_ORCAT Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 510001 6A01011009 SPOS01_ORIDENT Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO stVal BOOLEAN 510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO Quality 510001 3101011005 SPOS01_QUALITY Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO Timestamp 510001 9001011006 SPOS01_TIMESTAMP...
Page 564 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.1-31 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object for GIG01501 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper...
Page 565 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.1.6 SPOS01 (FunctionID:510001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Commo n items SPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time SPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock SPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock SPOS01-EN Off / On...
Page 566 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.1.7  Signal monitoring points in SPOS01 SPOS01(FunctionID:510001) Element ID Name Description 8001011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL 0001001F74 SPOS_SEL_OR SPOS multi select check signal for Auto sequence 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE SPOS01 state 0001011D90 SPOS01_SLD_RPT SPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS 0001011D97 SPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK SPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS 0001011F52...
Page 567 6F2S1915 (0.46)  Signal monitoring points in SPOS01 SPOS01(FunctionID:510001) Element ID Name Description 8301011E9D SPOS01_CTR_SGN SPOS01 control logic stage(unselected) 8401011F77 SPOS01_OFEX_BO SPOS01 on/off direction execute binary output signal 8501011E8F SPOS01_EX_SFL SPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic 8501011F5B SPOS01_OSL_CS42 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 42 8501011F60 SPOS01_FSL_CS19 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 19...
Page 568 6F2S1915 (0.46)  Connection point in PLC logic SPOS01(Function ID: 510001) Element ID Name Description 800101EE65 SPOS01IN_TMP_40 SPOS01IN_TMP_40 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01IN_TMP_42 820101EE5E SPOS01IN_TMP_44 SPOS01IN_TMP_44 830101EE5F SPOS01IN_TMP_45 SPOS01IN_TMP_45 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 Mapping points in SPOS01  SPOS(FunctionID:510001) Element ID Name Description 7001016D08...
Page 569 6F2S1915 (0.46) Double position controller with synchronizing-checking (DPSY) The double position controller with synchronizing-check (DPSY†) function is used when the user wishes to control a device from the “Closed” or “Open” condition. Generally, the device controlled by the DPSY function is either a 43-switch or a CB. The DPSY function has two measurements: an operation counter and an operation timer.
Page 570 6F2S1915 (0.46) Two devices can be controlled separately; i.e., the DPSY function has two separate sets of logic for control (i.e., DPSY01 and DPSY02 functions). For simplicity, only the DPSY01 function is discussed here; the features in the DPSY02 function are identical to the DPSY01 function. Select logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.2.1 The user should set scheme switch [DPSY01-CTREN] On prior to DPSY01 operation.
Page 571 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in DPSY01 Output DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) Command “Remote-Closing Control” For SBO operation 511001 7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command with ILK† 1≥ & & condition & synchro-check‡‡ To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command with ILK†...
Page 572 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: The synchronism voltage check is executed by the SYNCHK function. ‡‡ Note: A timer is provided to determine an operation failure. The maximum value of the §§ settings [SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI] or [SYNC01_TDRDI] is used as the decision time. For more information on settings, see the SYNDIF function.
Page 573 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “select command Open” from the remote-end (ii) Figure 4.2-3 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Open’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command Closing from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command Open from the remote-end Cancel command...
Page 574 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control it is in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function Note: To know the input and output points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table 4.2-6 and †† Table 4.2-10.
Page 575 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in DPSY01 Output DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) For SBO operation Selection command Command “Local-Closing-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & For DIR operation To “Wait for a next Operation command command” with ILK† condition To BO connection ILK†...
Page 576 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Open” from the local-end (iv) Figure 4.2-7 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Open’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command Closing from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command Open from the remote-end Cancel command...
Page 577 6F2S1915 (0.46) it is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function Note: To identify the output signals of the DPSY02 logic, see Table 4.2-10. †† Output signal to BO When the “select condition”...
Page 578 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in DPSY01 Output DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) & 1≥ Closing-control command requiring ILK† and synchro For DIR operation (PLC#1) checks (PLC#1 connection point) To “Wait for a next † Operate command with ILK 511001 800201EE35 DEV01_CL_SYNC_INTER command”...
Page 579 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Open” by PLC function (vi) Figure 4.2-11 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Open’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Select command Closing from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command Open from the remote-end Cancel command...
Page 580 6F2S1915 (0.46) The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point “DPSY01_FSL_BO_CSF” Note: The output point “DPSY01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.2-4. Select condition (vii) Figure 4.2-13 shows the select condition logic in the DPSY01 function. The DPSY01 function checks the condition for the select command using the signal “DPSY01_3PH_STATE”...
Page 581 6F2S1915 (0.46) From SOFTSW*1 DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) Command blocking CBK_STATE 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR To selection logic Other devices traveling detected*3 Select condition Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6 = DPSY01_F_QLT_SPP...
Page 582 6F2S1915 (0.46) 4.2.6(i)-3) Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘Opening’ and ‘Closing’ operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e., when closing (opening) is performed sequentially).
Page 583 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.2-5 PLC connection points (Interlock for Command ‘Closing/Open’) Signal Number Signal Name Description 570001 3102011DA2 DPSY01-Open DPSY01 interlock condition for Open control. 570001 3102021DA2 DPSY02-Open DPSY02 interlock condition for Open control. 570001 3102011DA0 DPSY01-Close DPSY01 interlock condition for Close control. 570001 3102021DA0 DPSY02-Close DPSY02 interlock condition for Close control.
Page 584 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting names (ix) Table 4.2-11 Setting of SBO control in DPSY Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value DPSY01-CTREN Activate control function Close Open / Close DPSY01-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC DPSY01-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control DIR / SBO DPSY02-CTREN...
Page 585 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.2.2 In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel conditions are satisfied, accordingly, the IED can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 586 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point “DPSY01_CC_SS”, when the DPSY01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at monitoring point DPSY01_CC_FS” “if the DPSY01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel”...
Page 587 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.2-17, is able to issue a “Select to cancel” signal at the monitoring point “DPSY01_CC_SS”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the “Local-Cancel” signal is true. Cancel condition logic (iii) Figure 4.2-18 shows the cancel condition logic.
Page 588 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.2-12 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition) Signal Number Signal Name Description 511001 800201EE69 DPSY01IN_TMP_46 DPSY01 user configurable cancel condition 511001 800202EE69 DPSY02IN_TMP_46 DPSY02 user configurable cancel condition Table 4.2-13 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition) Signal Number Signal Name Description...
Page 589 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.2.3 Once the operation of the select logic is complete, the operate logic start to control the device. Receiving “operate command Closing” from the remote-end Figure 4.2-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Closing’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 590 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPSY01 Output “ DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF” (511001 8002011E7F) DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) “ DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS” (511001 8102011E82) Command “Remote-Closing-Control” [DPSY01-CPW] Operate Command with ILK† 511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ & 1≥ 1≥ condition & synchro-checking & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Command with &...
Page 591 6F2S1915 (0.46) *Note: The user can set the type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch [DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting [DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed. Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table ††...
Page 592 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPSY01 Output DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001 “ “ DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF” DPYS01_FEC_OK_CS” (511001 8002011E7E) (511001 8002011E7E) Command “Remote-On-Control” [DPSY01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ 1≥ with ILK† condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 593 6F2S1915 (0.46) PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs. Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point “DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the input signal “Remote- Open-Control”...
Page 594 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPSY01 Output DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) “ “ DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF” DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS” (511001 8002011E7F) (511001 8102011E82) Command “Local-Closing-Control” [DPSY01-CPW] Operate Command with ILK 511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ & 1≥ 1≥ condition & synchro-checking & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s ILK condition (“Closing”) passed DPSY01-Close 1≥...
Page 595 6F2S1915 (0.46) *Note: The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch [DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting [DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed. Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table ††...
Page 596 6F2S1915 (0.46) To BO connection Operate logic in DPSY01 Output Input “ DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF” (511001 8002011E7E) DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) “ DPSY01_FEC_OK_CS” (511001 8002011E7E) Operate Cmd. Command “Local-Open-Control” [DPSY01-CPW] with ILK† condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 597 6F2S1915 (0.46) PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs. Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-31, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point “DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the signal “Local-Open- Control”...
Page 598 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPSY01 Output “ DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF” (511001 8002011E7F) DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) “ DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS” (511001 8102011E82) Closing control command with ILK† and synchro checks (PLC#1 connection point) [DPSY01-CPW] Operate Command with ILK† 511001 800201EE35 DEV01_CL_SYNC_INTER &...
Page 599 6F2S1915 (0.46) [DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied to [DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed. Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the DPSY02 logic, see Table ††...
Page 600 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPSY01 Output “ DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF” (511001 8002011E7E) DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) “ DPSY01_FEC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-Open-Control” with ILK† (511001 8002011E7E) (PLC#4 connection point) [DPSY01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 511001 800201EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥...
Page 601 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the DPSY02 logic, see Table †† 4.2-16 for PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs. Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-30, can issue an “Operate” signal at output-point “DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the “PLC-Open-Control”...
Page 602 6F2S1915 (0.46) DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) Command blocking*1 CBK_STATE 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR To selection logic Other devices traveling detected*3 Operate condition Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6 = DPSY01_F_QLT_SPP...
Page 603 6F2S1915 (0.46) 4.2.6(i)-3) Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits Note: The “Common control” (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation- direction of logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction.
Page 604 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 511001 800202EE65 DPSY02IN_TMP_40 DPSY02 user additional condition(PLC#1) 511001 810201EE66 DPSY01IN_TMP_41 DPSY01 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) 511001 810202EE66 DPSY02IN_TMP_41 DPSY02 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) 511001 820201ED50 DPSY01IN_TMP_28 DPSY01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) 511001 820202ED50 DPSY02IN_TMP_28 DPSY02 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) Table 4.2-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO) Signal Number...
Page 605 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation counter 4.2.4 The DPSY01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation-counter to predict the lifespan of switchgear and other functions. The user can select a count mode using a setting. Table 4.2-23 and Figure 4.2-32 show the modes for which a user is required to change a mode in response to a device signal.
Page 606 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote end Mapping of Input point required Figure 4.2-34 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is received at the DPSY01 logic. With regard three-phase counter, input-point “DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point “DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ”...
Page 607 6F2S1915 (0.46) The DPSY01 function can issue a “Result” signal at the output point “DPSY01_SLD_CSCN”. Operate condition for the counter (iii) Figure 4.2-36 illustrates the operate condition logic. The DPSY01 function can determine an operate-condition using a signal received from “Control hierarchy”. The Control hierarchy condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic (i.e., 43R/L);...
Page 608 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal names and number (iv) Table 4.2-24 Mapping points Signal Number Signal Name Description 511001 7002016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ DPSY01 change command received.(Mapping Data) for 3-phase counter value 511001 7002016D0A DEV01_APH_REQ DPSY01 change command received.(Mapping Data) for phase-A counter value 511001 7002016D0B DEV01_BPH_REQ DPSY01 change command received.(Mapping Data) for phase-B counter value...
Page 609 6F2S1915 (0.46) Measurement of operation intervals 4.2.5 The DPSY01 function can measure operation intervals (OT1 to OT4)†; the intervals OT1 to OT2 can represent the period of time when a switch changes from “Closed” to “open”. In the DPSY01 function the operation period is grouped into sub-time periods, as shown in Table 4.2-28.
Page 610 6F2S1915 (0.46) Monitoring sub-menu Operation Time DPSY1-OT1 10:48 1/26 10:48 _DPSY1-OT > DPSY_SYN-Dev1-OT1 CANCEL DPSY2-OT > ******.*** ms DPOS1-OT > DPSY_SYN-Dev1-OT2 DPOS2-OT > ******.*** ms DPOS3-OT > ENTER DPSY_SYN-Dev1-OT3 DPOS4-OT > Figure 4.2-39 Operation time sub-menu Signal names and numbers Table 4.2-29 Mapping points Signal Number Signal Name...
Page 611 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setup for BIO module 4.2.6 The user should connect the DPSY input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits; subsequently, the DPSY function is able to issue select and operate commands. In order to set up the DPSY function the user should execute the following four steps. Do not confuse setting BOs between step (ii) and step (iii).
Page 612 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from the BI circuit and DPSY01 Signal acquisition logic in DPSY01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPSY01 condition logics “DPSY01_3PH_STATE” (511001 3102011001) Phase-A signals BI signal selected by setting [DPSY01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 613 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from the BI circuit and DPSY01 Signal acquisition logic in DPSY01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPSY01 condition logics “DPSY01_3PH_STATE” (511001 3102011001) Single phase signals BI signal selected by setting [DPSY01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 614 6F2S1915 (0.46) operation of the detection function from Time ‘A’ (e.g., Time ‘A’ to Time ‘C’). The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the point at which event suppression stops using the setting [DPSY-TELR]; as a result, no suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time ‘D’...
Page 615 6F2S1915 (0.46) points “DPSY01_OEX_BO” and “DPSY01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate command Closing” and the “Operate command Open” signals are issued at BO3 and BO4 respectively. Terminal and Operate logic in DPSY01 BO3 and BO4 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire “...
Page 616 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting for “Select command Closing” For example, the point “DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of the command; the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function using the setting [DPSY01-OSLBORD]. Do not key the point “DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG”. Selection logic in DPSY01 Contact health check...
Page 617 6F2S1915 (0.46) Selection logic in DPSY01 Contact health check “ ” DPSY01_OEX_BO logic in DPSY01 “511001 8202011DD3” Result of contact health check & BO3circuit at IO#1 “ ” BO3-RB “200B01_8202021113” Signal designated by setting [DPSY01-OEXBORD] Connection made by the user Figure 4.2-47 Example connection of “Operate command Closing”...
Page 618 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example) Figure 4.2-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 4.2-31, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Page 619 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2) Figure 4.2-50 shows a setting example an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.2-32, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect.
Page 620 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3) Figure 4.2-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the setting [DPSY01-OSLBORD];...
Page 621 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.2-36 PLC monitoring points (Output of operate signal in DPSY) Signal Number Signal Name Description 511001 8202011DD3 DPSY01_OEX_BO DPSY01 operate (CLOSE) command for Binary Output. 511001 8202021DD3 DPSY02_OEX_BO DPSY02 operate (CLOSE) command for Binary Output. 511001 8102011DD0 DPSY01_FEX_BO DPSY01 operate (OPEN) command for Binary Output.
Page 622 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 4.2.7 The user can operate the DPSY function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the DPSY function is designed for the class of “Double Point Controller (DPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 623 6F2S1915 (0.46)  SBOw  Oper  Cancel  origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 4.2-53 LN editing screen for SBO mode Defining DIR mode Figure 4.2-54 exemplifies the SPOS logic node saved as “CSWI1”.
Page 624 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.2-39 Mapping signals for CSWI1 object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$origin orCat orCategory 511001 3102011008 DPSY01_3PH_ORCAT Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$origin orIdent Octet64 511001 6A02011009 DPSY01_3PH_ORIDENT Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos stVal Dbpos 511001 3102011001 DPSY01_3PH_STATE Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos Quality 511001 3102011005 DPSY01_3PH_QUALITY Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos Timestamp 511001 9002011006 DPSY01_3PH_TIMESTAMP...
Page 625 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.2-40 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI1 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper...
Page 626 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.2.8 DPSY01(FunctionID:511001 ) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Commo n DPSY-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time DPSY-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock DPSY-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock DPSY01-EN Off / On...
Page 627 6F2S1915 (0.46) DPSY01(FunctionID:511001 ) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FixedLogic / DPSY01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic FixedLogic / DPSY01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail DPSY01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic factor...
Page 628 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.2.9 Signal monitoring points in DPSY01  DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 8002011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL 8002001F99 DPSY00_CH_EC_LCD DPSY00 count change execute command by LCD 8002001D5E DPSY00_CH_EC_OWS DPSY00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI) 8002001D5F DPSY00_CH_EC_RCC DPSY00 count change execute command by RCC 8002001D60 DPSY00_CH_EC_RMT...
Page 629 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in DPSY01  DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 8002011EA1 DPSY01_CTR_SGW DPSY01 control logic stage(wait for change) 8102011E9A DPSY01_ECF_FCT_EIS DPSY01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check 8002011D58 DPSY01_EC_LCD DPSY01 execute command by LCD 8002011D55 DPSY01_EC_OWS DPSY01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
Page 630 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in DPSY01  DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 3102011F95 DPSY01_OT3_SIGNAL DPSY01 operation time3 reset signal 3102011D36 DPSY01_OT3_VAL DPSY01 operation time3 value 3102011F97 DPSY01_OT4_SIGNAL DPSY01 operation time4 reset signal 3102011D39 DPSY01_OT4_VAL DPSY01 operation time4 value 8002011F98 DPSY01_RE_EC_LCD DPSY01 reset time execute command by LCD...
Page 631 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in DPSY01  DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 3102011D82 DPSY01_TMP_08 DPSY01 control event data (select release) 3102011D83 DPSY01_TMP_09 DPSY01 control event data (execute output on) 3102011D84 DPSY01_TMP_10 DPSY01 control event data (execute command ng) 3102011D86 DPSY01_TMP_11 DPSY01 control event data (execute fail)
Page 632 6F2S1915 (0.46)  Connection point in PLC logic DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 800201EE69 DPSY01IN_TMP_46 DPSY01IN_TMP_46 800201ED5A DPSY01IN_TMP_47 DPSY01IN_TMP_47 800201ED77 DPSY01IN_TMP_48 DPSY01IN_TMP_48 Mapping points in DPSY01  DPSY(Function ID: 511001) Element ID Name Description 7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPSY01 control command received. (Mapping Data) Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1 device, but a 2 and other devices are also provided in the DPSY function.
Page 633 6F2S1915 (0.46) Software switch controller function (SOFTSW) Sixty-four position software-switches (CBK, ICB, SCB, and -01 to -61) are provided in the IED memory as virtual switches; they are used to determine the operation of internal processes in the IED. Either the criteria “Enable (On)” or “Disable (Off)” may be applied for each software switch, S43.
Page 634 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 4.3-1 shows the eight switches and their controller functions. The statuses of the S43 switches are stored in the IED non-volatile memory; hence, the IED can retrieve their status while power is not being supplied to the IED. Switches for special purposes CMDBLK...
Page 635 6F2S1915 (0.46) conditions. (See control and operation logic for the respective control applications.) Interlock bypassing (ICB) provided (ii) When the user executes control applications from the IED front panel, the Interlock bypassing (ICB) function enables control applications to bypass their interlock conditions if required. When the ICB is engaged, all control processes, operated from the IED front panel, are able to bypass their interlock conditions.
Page 636 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input SOFTSW1 logic Output To user-programmed logic Command reception in S4301 S4301_STATE Command provided by the PLC function (522001 000A041001) Software switch operation is 522001 700A046D08 S4301__CONTROL_REQ performed. Figure 4.3-5 Logic “SOFTSW1” and response “S4301_STATE” SOFTSW output-status Table 4.3-2 shows the list of output signals of the SOFTSW functions. Table 4.3-2 Output signals of SOFTSW function Signal Number Signal Name...
Page 637 6F2S1915 (0.46) Control logics for SBO/DIR modes 4.3.2 For example, the user should set scheme switch [S4301-EN] to On when the SOFTSW1 function is required to be operated. Table 4.3-10 shows all scheme switches for the SOFTSW functions. Receiving “select command for On operation” from the remote-end Input point required mapping Figure 4.3-6 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-ON-Control)”...
Page 638 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal for monitoring The user can monitor a “Select success” signal at the output point “S4301_OSL_CSF”, when the SOFTSW1 function determines that the received “Remote-ON-Control” signal is true. If the SOFTSW1 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the “Wait for a command”...
Page 639 6F2S1915 (0.46) panel Input signal Figure 4.3-8 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when “On” key is pressed on the IED front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped. Note that the user should set scheme switch [S4301-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from the IED front panel is performed;...
Page 640 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001) For SBO operation Command “Local-Off-Control” Select command 1≥ & & For DIR operation For monitoring Operate command & “S4301_FSD_CSF” (522001_8D0A041F45) Select “success” 0.1s To “Wait for a command” Select “Failed”...
Page 641 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001) ON-control command For DIR operation† (PLC connection point #1) Operate command For monitoring 522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON & “S4301_OSD_CSF” (522001_8F0A411F49) Select “success” 0.1s To “Wait for a command”...
Page 642 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal to monitoring The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.3-11, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point “S4301_FSD_CSF”. Note: The output point “S4301_FSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.3-7. Select condition (vii) Figure 4.3-12 shows the select condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function.
Page 643 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in command is not identical to “IED test status”. Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be 43R/L;...
Page 644 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 820A40ED50 S4303_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW61 (S43-61) Table 4.3-6 Mapping points for the command reception in SOFTSWx Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 700A016D08 CBK_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in CBK 522001 700A026D08 ICB_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in ICB 522001 700A036D08...
Page 645 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description …. …. …. 522001 8D0A401F45 S4361_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW61 (S43-61) Setting names (ix) Table 4.3-10 Setting of SOFTSWx control Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value CBK-EN Function activation in CBK Off / On ICB-EN Function activation in ICB...
Page 646 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.3.3 In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel conditions are satisfied, accordingly, the function can discard the select command. Receiving “Cancel” from remote-end Figure 4.3-13 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 function.
Page 647 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “operate command On” from remote-end Figure 4.3-15 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception of the “Select command (Remote-On-Control)”. Input Operate logic in SOFTSW1 Output SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001) “S4301_OEC_CHG”...
Page 648 6F2S1915 (0.46) information, see Figure 4.3-21. §Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. Receiving “operate command On” from the local end (iii) Figure 4.3-17 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution of On” key is pressed on the IED front panel.
Page 649 6F2S1915 (0.46) †Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.3-12, Table 4.3-13, and Table 4.3-14. ‡Note: “operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more information, see Figure 4.3-21. §Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. Receiving “operate command On”...
Page 650 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in SOFTSW1 Output SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001) “S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC” ON-control command (522001_8C0A041F5D) (PLC connection point #2) Operate Command 522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF & ON to OFF Operate condition‡ ASEQ function§” is in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS” (522001_870A041F62) 522001_830A041D02 Operate completed &...
Page 651 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB_RCV_OR in Table 4.3-8)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to protect the substation. The user can configure it using GR-TIEMS. Note: Detection of event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.3-8)” signifies that other operators are changing the status of one or more devices.
Page 652 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 8A0A061F5B S4303_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW3 (S43-03) … … … 522001 8C0A401F5D S4361_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW61 (S43-61) Table 4.3-13 Success signals of the operation Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 870A011F62...
Page 653 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.3-17 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On” by PLC Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA022 522001 8B0A021F5C ICB_OEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA022 522001 8B0A031F5C SCB_OEC_CHG_PLC SCB signal after KC_S43_SA022 522001 8B0A041F5C S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW1 signal after KC_S43_SA022...
Page 654 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 4.3.5 The user can operate the SOFTSW1 function over IEC 61850 communications following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SOFTSW1 function is designed for the class of “Single Point Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 655 6F2S1915 (0.46) SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld  sboClass (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )  Figure 4.3-23 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 4.3-24 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO701” when the DIR mode is required for the SOFTSW1 function.
Page 656 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.3-19 shows the required mapping signals in SOFTSW1 function to the IEC 61850 communications. Figure 4.3-25 shows how to map a signal. Table 4.3-19 Mapping signals for SPCSO object. Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory 522001 310A041008...
Page 657 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.3-20 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object in SOFTSW1 function Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN...
Page 658 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.3.6 SOTFSW(FunctionID:522001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note CBK-EN Off / On - control command block switch Enable ICB-EN Off / On - Interlock check bypass in controlled on LCD SCB-EN Off / On - Synchro check bypass in controlled on LCD S4301-EN Off / On - Soft 43 switch1 Enable...
Page 659 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.3.7 Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 000A011001 CBK_STATE CMDBLK status 000A011D90 CBK_STSELD CMDBLK the controllable data is in the status 310A011D00 CBK_STS_MIMIC CMDBLK status 310A011D01 CBK_STS CMDBLK status 800A011D51 CBK_SC_OWS CMDBLK select command by OWS(HMI) 800A011D52 CBK_SC_RCC CMDBLK select command by RCC...
Page 660 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 310A021D00 ICB_STS_MIMIC ILKBYP status 310A021D01 ICB_STS ILKBYP status 800A021D51 ICB_SC_OWS ILKBYP select command by OWS(HMI) 800A021D52 ICB_SC_RCC ILKBYP select command by RCC 800A021D53 ICB_SC ILKBYP select command 800A021D54 ICB_SC_LCD ILKBYP select command by LCD 800A021D55...
Page 661 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 800A031D58 SCB_EC_LCD SYNCBYP execute command by LCD 800A031D55 SCB_EC_OWS SYNCBYP execute command by OWS(HMI) 800A031D56 SCB_EC_RCC SYNCBYP execute command by RCC 8F0A031F51 SCB_EX_CMP_TM0 SYNCBYP signal after MCTS43_SC002 870A031F62 SCB_EX_SS SYNCBYP signal execute success 8A0A031F5B...
Page 662 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 310A041D00 S4301_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch1 status 310A041D01 S4301_STS SOFT 43 switch1 status 800A041D51 S4301_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch1 select command by OWS(HMI) 800A041D52 S4301_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch1 select command by RCC 800A041D53 S4301_SC SOFT 43 switch1 select command...
Page 663 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 800A051D52 S4302_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch2 select command by RCC 800A051D53 S4302_SC SOFT 43 switch2 select command 800A051D54 S4302_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch2 select command by LCD 800A051D55 S4302_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch2 execute command by OWS(HMI) 800A051D56 S4302_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch2 execute command by RCC...
Page 664 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 800A061D55 S4303_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch3 execute command by OWS(HMI) 800A061D56 S4303_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch3 execute command by RCC 800A061D57 S4303_EC SOFT 43 switch3 execute command 800A061D58 S4303_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch3 execute command by LCD 800A061DE0 S4303_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch3 PLC control fail...
Page 665 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 800A3F1D56 S4360_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by RCC 800A3F1D57 S4360_EC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command 800A3F1D58 S4360_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by LCD 800A3F1DE0 S4360_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch60 PLC control fail 800A3F1F42 S4360_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA002...
Page 666 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 800A401DE0 S4361_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch61 PLC control fail 800A401F42 S4361_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch61 signal before KC_S43_SA002 810A401D03 S4361_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch61 On state 810A401F44 S4361_TMP4 SOFT 43 switch61 signal before KC_S43_SA003 820A401F40 S4361_TMP1 SOFT 43 switch61 signal before KC_S43_SA001...
Page 667 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection points in PLC logic  SOFTSW(Function ID:522001) Element ID Name Description 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch1 change to on 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch1 control right from PLC 860A05EDE0 S4302_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch2 change to off 850A05EDE1 S4302_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch2 change to on 820A05ED50...
Page 668 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation time reset function (OPTIM) As shown in Figure 4.4-1, all operation-times measured by the DPOS, DPSY, and TPOS functions† can be cleared when the operation time reset controller (OPTIM) function issues a reset command “OPTR01_RST_CMD”. That is, within the respective functions the measured time intervals (OT1 and the others‡) are entirely cleared upon occurrence of the reset command.
Page 669 6F2S1915 (0.46) ‡Note: The measurements in the DPOS and the DPSY functions are grouped into four intervals in each respective device. Measurement is possible by sensing the device events. The measured intervals are accumulated; they are grouped into four intervals (OT1–OT4), which the user can monitor from the IED screen. Figure 4.4-2 and Figure 4.4-3 exemplify the four intervals upon occurrence of On (Closing)-control event and Off (Open)-control event, provided that the DPOS function operates.
Page 670 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.4.1 The user should set the scheme switch [OPTR01-EN] to On prior to the OPTIM operation. Figure 4.4-4 shows select logic in the OPTIM function. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic Cancel logic Cancel command...
Page 671 6F2S1915 (0.46) *Note: The OPTIM function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a signal “ctlmodel” when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus, mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication. Output signal required to map (ii) The OPTIM function can issue a “Select success”...
Page 672 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command is not identical to “IED test status”. Note: The user should program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The user should connect its condition with the select condition logic using the connection point “OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT”.
Page 673 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic in SBO mode 4.4.2 In the SBO control mode the reception of the cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 674 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.4.3 After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic enters to clear all interval OTs. Wait for a command Wait for a next command Select logic Operate command from the remote-end Success Command Reset from the Operation...
Page 675 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate condition (iii) Figure 4.4-11 shows the operate condition logic, which is used to examine a reset-condition in the OPTIM function. OPTIM function (Function ID: 529001) Command blocking*1 CBK_STATE To operate logic 1≥ & Operate condition Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR Other devices traveling detected*3 Unmatched condition detected *4...
Page 676 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 4.4.4 The user can operate the OPTIM function over the IEC61850 communication after the mapping using the GR-TIEMS. Note that the OPTIM function is designed for “Single Point Controller (SPC) class” in the IEC61850 communication. The user should follow steps: Step1: Editing Logical Node Step2:...
Page 677 6F2S1915 (0.46) Defining SBO mode Figure 4.4-13 exemplifies the OPTIM logic node saved as “GGIO3302”. In the SBO mode, the user should select the following items for the “GGIO3302$SCPSO” using the GR-TIEMS: SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld ...
Page 678 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping output data (ii) The user should group the OPTIM signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should map them for the IEC61850 communication using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.4-15 shows how to map a signal; it shows that the signals of the OPTIM function are required to map for the IEC61850 communication.
Page 679 6F2S1915 (0.46) map the input-point to the Object references having attributes CO and CF† . Figure 4.4-16 shows how to map a signal. †Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC). Table 4.4-6 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object of GGIO3302 Object_reference Attribute...
Page 680 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.4.5 OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note OPTR01-EN Off / On - Reset Control Enable in OPTR GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 659 -...
Page 681 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.4.6 Signal monitoring points  OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001) Element ID Name Description 8B0C011F44 OPTR01_CTR_SGU OPTR01 signal before KC_OPTR_SC001 800C011D57 OPTR01_EC OPTR01 execute command 800C011D55 OPTR01_EC_OWS OPTR01 execute command by OWS(HMI) 800C011D56 OPTR01_EC_RCC OPTR01 execute command by RCC 8F0C011F49 OPTR01_EX_CMP_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC002...
Page 682 6F2S1915 (0.46) Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) The total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) can measure ‘operating time’ (i.e., a device- running-time, closing-time, switching-ON-time, etc.) with a binary signal which may be collected in the binary input circuits. The TOTALTIM function can keep the operation time in the memory;...
Page 683 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation feature 4.5.1 Time accumulation process Figure 4.5-1 outlines the time accumulation process within the TOTALTIM function. The TOTALTIM function accumulates the time for which the state of the operating signal is in the “ON” status every second. The accumulation process continues until the maximum accumulated time reaches 10,000 days (almost 27 years).
Page 684 6F2S1915 (0.46) TOTALTIM Device TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL TT12 BI12-CPL BI12 BI12-NC Device #12 Photo- Filter Operating signal #12 coupler TOTAL02_PLC_SGNL TT02 Device #2 BI2-CPL BI2-NC TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL front Photo- screen Filter Operating signal #2 screen coupler TT01 Device #1 BI1-CPL BI1-NC Photo- Filter Operating signal #1 coupler Contact-switch...
Page 685 6F2S1915 (0.46) Preparation for operation 4.5.2 The TOTALTIM function is enabled when the user sets [TTIM*-EN] On. Table 4.5-3 TOTALTIM operation Scheme switch Comment TTIM01-EN On / Off Operation enable for operating signal #1 TTIM02-EN On / Off Operation enable for operating signal #2 (omitted) (omitted) (omitted)
Page 686 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 4.5.3 The user can operate the TTIM01 function using IEC 61850 communications after first mapping the function using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows Step1: Editing Logical Node Step2: Mapping output data Step3: Mapping input data Editing Logical Node...
Page 687 6F2S1915 (0.46)  SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 4.5-4 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 4.5-5 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO1301”...
Page 688 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.5-4 Mapping signals for ISCSO1 object. Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orCat orCategory 5410013015011D23 TTIM01_TIM_ORCAT Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 5410016A15011FA7 TTIM01_TIM_ORIDENT Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stVal INT32 5410013215011D20 TTIM01_TIM_SEC_VAL Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 Quality 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 Timestamp 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN 5410010015011D91...
Page 689 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.5-5 Mapping signals required for GGIO1301 object in TTIM01 function Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlVal INT32 Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlVal INT32...
Page 690 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.5.4 TOTALTIM（Function ID: 541001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note TTIM01-EN Off / On - Switch for total time metering at Dev.01 TTIM02-EN Off / On - Switch for total time metering at Dev.02 TTIM03-EN Off / On - Switch for total time metering at Dev.03 TTIM04-EN Off / On...
Page 691 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.5.5 Signal monitoring points  TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001) Element ID Name Description 0015001F41 TTIM00_CCTRL_TIME TTIM00 total time correction summarize 8015001D58 TTIM00_CH_EC_LCD TTIM00 total time change execute command by LCD 8015001D55 TTIM00_CH_EC_OWS TTIM00 total time change execute command by OWS(HMI) 8015001D56 TTIM00_CH_EC_RCC TTIM00 total time change execute command by RCC...
Page 692 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001) Element ID Name Description 8315051E8B TTIM05_EC_F_CS TTIM05 execute command fail condition signal 8215051E84 TTIM05_EC_OK_CS TTIM05 execute command OK condition signal 8A15051E76 TTIM05_SLD_CS TTIM05 selected condition signal 8B15051E7B TTIM05_SLF_CS TTIM05 select fail condition signal 3215051F41 TTIM05_TIM_MIN TTIM05 total time (minutes)
Page 693 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001) Element ID Name Description 32150A1F41 TTIM10_TIM_MIN TTIM10 total time (minutes) 00150A1D91 TTIM10_TMP_01 TTIM10 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS 84150B1E95 TTIM11_CC_SS TTIM11 cancel success signal 89150B1EA2 TTIM11_CTR_SGU TTIM11 control logic stage(under selection) 83150B1E8B TTIM11_EC_F_CS TTIM11 execute command fail condition signal...
Page 694 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping point in TTIM01  TOTALTIM (Function ID: 541001) Element ID Name Description 7015066D08 TOTAL06_CMM_REQ TOTAL06 correction request from cmm 7015076D08 TOTAL07_CMM_REQ TOTAL07 correction request from cmm 7015086D08 TOTAL08_CMM_REQ TOTAL08 correction request from cmm 7015096D08 TOTAL09_CMM_REQ TOTAL09 correction request from cmm 70150A6D08 TOTAL10_CMM_REQ TOTAL10 correction request from cmm...
Page 695 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchronizing check for different network (SYNDIF) The Synchronizing check function (SYNCHK) is provided for checking for the presence of voltage or the voltage/frequency-variance when connection between two parts of a network is required. The SYNCHK function is of benefit where the “Double position controller with synchronizing-check (DPSY†)”...
Page 696 6F2S1915 (0.46) The SYNCHK_RY function consists of several over-voltage and under-voltage and synchronizing relays (OV, UV, and SyncRys) integrated within the synchronization check feature (SYNCHK). The SYNCHK function issues permissive signals to the DPSY functions; hence, ensuring that the DPSY functions are only able to close the CB when the required conditions for closure have been satisfied.
Page 697 6F2S1915 (0.46) operating area of OV characteristic. The OVr1 element is used to check for the presence of voltage on the running-line; similarly, the OVi1 element is used to check for the presence of voltage on the incoming-line. The user can set pick-up thresholds using the settings [OVR1] and [OVI1].
Page 698 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchronization check relays 4.6.2 Figure 4.6-3 shows the variance of voltages, phase-angles and frequencies for Vr and Vi. Settings [OVR1] and [OVI1] Setting [SyncRy1-Angle] Δ V Setting [SyncRy1-dV] Figure 4.6-3 Permissible ranges for connections between synchronous networks The provision of a signal for CB closure between two networks may be required subject to the variance of the two voltages, phase-angles and frequencies being small.
Page 699 6F2S1915 (0.46) Δ increasing V i ‡ Δ reducing Δ near zero Δ V r † Figure 4.6-4 Permissible ranges for connections between asynchronous networks Note: Vr is the voltage on a running line. † Note: Vi is the voltage on an incoming line. ‡...
Page 700 6F2S1915 (0.46) Phase-angle variance (Δθ) (see Figure 4.6-4) The phase-angle variance of Vr and Vi (Δθ) is measured by the phase-angle variance-relay having the setting [SyncRy1-Angle]. If the following equations are satisfied, the SyncRy1- Angle relay determines that the phase-angle variance is inside the permissible range. (4.6-4) ×...
Page 701 6F2S1915 (0.46) 2 × Setting [SyncR1-Angle] (4.6-9) Time = × 360° ∆f[Hz] Check time for the synchronism: 2 × Setting [SyncR1-Angle] (4.6-10) Setting [ SYNC01_TSYN ] < × 360° ∆f[Hz] Equations rearrangements: Setting [SyncR1-Angle] (4.6-11) Setting [ SYNC01_TSYN ] < ×...
Page 702 6F2S1915 (0.46) Split-synchronism-check element (SyncRy1-θ=0, SyncRy1-θless) (ii) With regard to the connection of asynchronous networks, it is necessary to use the technique of split synchronism to avoid the occurrence of cycle-slip on the system. The technique consists of three parts: (1) calculation of the synchronization point (SyncRy1-θ=0), (2) check for slip cycle (SyncRy1-θless), and (3) advance time for issuing the closure command.
Page 703 6F2S1915 (0.46) (b) Incoming voltage (V i ) Vr − Vi Zero point (Δθ=0) Advance time (c) Beat wave provided by V r + V i Δθ Start to close CB End of closing CB Time α β Setting CB closing command Tolerance for synchronism CB contact Zero point (Δθ=0)
Page 704 6F2S1915 (0.46) Line-outage check 4.6.3 Voltage conditions In the SYNCHK function the OVr, OVi, UVr, and UVi elements are used to verify the line- condition. For example, when the user wishes to connect an incoming-line (i.e., transmission line) with the running-line (i.e., a busbar), the voltage conditions on either lines may be examined prior to connection.
Page 705 6F2S1915 (0.46) OVR1 To SYNCHK 561001 8201001B62 & LDLI1: Both Running-line and Incoming-line in-service 561001 8001001B63 UVR1 & LRDI1: Running-line in service & Incoming-line out-of-service 561001 8301001B60 OVI1 & DRLI1: Running-line out-of-service & Incoming-line in-service 561001 8101001B61 UVI1 & DRDI1: Both Running-line and Incoming-line out-of-service Figure 4.6-8 Line-outage check logic in SYNCHK_Ry1 OVR2 To SYNCHK...
Page 706 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input SYNCHK logic in SYNCHK1 Output DPSY01 (Function ID: 511001) From DPSY01 511001 8002011E45 Close command (Select) DPSY01_OSE_RCV SYNCHK_Ry (Function ID: 561001) From SYNCHK_Ry1 LRLI1 & DRLI1 LRLI1 LRDI1 & DRLI1 & SYNCHK1 (Function ID: 560001) DRDI1 LRDI1 DRDI1 &...
Page 707 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input SYNCHK2 logic Output DPSY02 (Function ID: 511001) From DPSY02 511001 8002021E45 Close command (Select) DPSY02_OSE_RCV SYNCHK_Ry (Function ID: 561001) From SYNCHK_Ry1 LRLI1 & DRLI1 LRLI1 LRDI1 & DRLI1 & SYNCHK2 (Function ID: 560001) DRDI1 LRDI1 DRDI1 & SYNC02_SCK_CS05 SYNC02_SCK_CS11 560001 880B021F63...
Page 708 6F2S1915 (0.46) Permission signal “SYNC01_SLD_VCS”† The “SYNC01_SLD_VCS” signal is transferred to the DPSY01 select-logic. For example, suppose the DPSY01 function is given permission to operate when any voltage-condition is satisfied, then the user should set On for the scheme switches [SYNCHK01-LRDIEN], [SYNCHK01-DRLIEN], and [SYNCHK01-DRDIEN].
Page 709 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchronization check 4.6.4 The user should set On for scheme switch [SYNC01-SYNCHK1EN] when synchronization check is required. Synchronization conditions The synchronizing relays are used to check the respective conditions of the incoming-line and the running-line. For example, the ∆V, ∆θ, and ∆f variances of Vi and Vr may be examined when the SYNCHK function is used in a synchronous network.
Page 710 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.6-6 Synchronization settings in SYNCHK1 Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value SYNC01_SYNCHK1EN SYNCHK1 synchronization checking enable On / Off Synchronism check timer for synchronous SYNC01_TSYN 0.00–100.00s system SYNC01_TSYN2 Timer to give up the synchronization 30.0–1800.0s SYNC01_Split_EN SYNCHK1 async.
Page 711 6F2S1915 (0.46) SYNCHK logic in SYNCHK2 Output Input DPSY01 (Function ID: 511001) From DPSY02 511001 8B02021E48 Close command (Operate) DPSY02_OEC_RCV SYNCHK2 (Function ID: 560001) From SYNCHK2 560001 850B021F59 SYNC02_SYN_CLC SYNCHK_Ry (Function ID: 561001) From SYNCHK_Ry1 ΔV1 SyncRy1-dV SYNCHK2 (Function ID: 560001) SYNC02_SCK_CS16 &...
Page 712 6F2S1915 (0.46) “SYNC01_SYN_CLC”. Unsuccessful synchronization check If the injected signal “DPSY01_OEC_RCV” persists for longer than a pre-determined time, the check logic determines that synchronization has not occurred; hence, the check logic can issue a failure signal for the DPSY01 function. Consequently, the DPSY01 function abandons the attempt to close the CB due to the failure in the synchronization process.
Page 713 6F2S1915 (0.46) Relay selection for checking synchronization 4.6.5 Figure 4.6-16 exemplifies a bus-bar arrangement used as an example for check synchronization. In this example, the SYNCHK_Ry1 relays require the voltage signals† V3, V4, and V1. This is because DS1 and DS3 are closed, but DS2 is open; the selection of SYNCHK_Ry1 is initiated by the reception of the “SYNCHK_Ry1_selection”...
Page 714 6F2S1915 (0.46) SYNCHK_Ry (Function ID: 561001) SYNCHK_Ry1 ΔV1 SyncRy1-dV & Δf1 SyncRy1-df & ΔƟ1 SyncRy1-dƟ & SyncRy1-Ɵ≈0 ΔƟ1≈0 & SyncRy1-Ɵ less ΔƟ1 less & ≥ SYNCHK_Ry (Function ID: 561001) SYNCHK_Ry2 ΔV2 To DPSY01 SyncRy2-dV & ≥ 560001 850B011F59 Δf2 SyncRy2-df &...
Page 715 6F2S1915 (0.46) Voltage selection for line arrangement 4.6.6 As shown in Figure 4.6-16, input-voltage signals are required in response to the line and bus- bar arrangement. Incidentally, the input-voltage signals supplied by the VTs are applied to the IED via the transformer module (VCT†); hence, the input-voltage signal should correspond with the required relay-element.
Page 716 6F2S1915 (0.46) Busbar#1 Busbar#2 ✔ DS1 closed & SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS DS2 closed V1 V2 S43P logic programmed Selection of SYNCHK_Ry1 by the user SYNCHK01 and 02 functions Figure 4.6-19 Bus-bar arrangement and PLC setting Voltage selection should be considered in accordance with the arrangement of VTs. Voltages V1 and V2 represent the running voltage (V R ) and the incoming voltage (V I ), respectively.
Page 717 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.6.7 Synchronism (Function ID: 560001 ) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note SYNC01_SYNCHK1EN Off / On - SYNC DEV1 synchronism check switch SYNC02_SYNCHK2EN Off / On - SYNC DEV2 synchronism check switch SYNC 01 V check timer(Live Run. & Dead Incom., Dead SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI 0.00 - 5.00 5.00...
Page 718 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchk_Ry (Function ID: 561001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Synchronizing V-L1 / V-L2 / V- check relay 1 L3 / V-L12 / V- L23 / V-L31 / SyncRy1-VR V2-L1 / V2-L2 / - Running Voltage V2-L3 / V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31 / V3 / V4 V-L1 / V-L2 / V-...
Page 719 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.6.8 Signal monitoring points  SYNDIF (Function ID: 560001) Element ID Name Description 880B011F5C SYNC01_DDV_CS SYNC DEV1 27Vr & 27Vi condition signal 870B011F5B SYNC01_DLV_CS SYNC DEV1 27Vr & 84Vi condition signal 890B011F5D SYNC01_LDV_CS SYNC DEV1 84Vr & 27Vi condition signal 860B011F5A SYNC01_LLV_CS SYNC DEV1 84Vr &...
Page 720 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SYNDIF (Function ID: 560001) Element ID Name Description 850B011F59 SYNC01_SYN_CLC SYNC DEV1 synchronism close command 880B021F5C SYNC02_DDV_CS SYNC DEV2 27Vr & 27Vi condition signal 870B021F5B SYNC02_DLV_CS SYNC DEV2 27Vr & 84Vi condition signal 890B021F5D SYNC02_LDV_CS SYNC DEV2 84Vr &...
Page 721 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points  SYNDIF (Function ID: 560001) Element ID Name Description 850B021F59 SYNC02_SYN_CLC SYNC DEV2 synchronism close command Connection points in PLC logic  SYNCHK (Function ID: 560001) Element ID Name Description 800B01EDEA SYNC01_DDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 27Vr & 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC 800B01EDE9 SYNC01_DLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 27Vr &...
Page 722 6F2S1915 (0.46) Software interlock function (ILK) Devices must be controlled in accordance with the prevailing operational condition of the electric power system. If a device does not act or behave in accordance with the operational circumstances, inappropriate device control can result in outages or fatal incidents for the network.
Page 723 6F2S1915 (0.46) Prior to controlling a device, the interlock-check function is used to determine whether the control of a device is correct or not. If the interlock-check finds that the conditions for device control have not been satisfied in accordance with the appropriate interlock condition, control of the device is forbidden.
Page 724 6F2S1915 (0.46) other IEDs and GOOSE, is necessary. Interlock-check formula 4.7.2 Figure 4.7-2 shows a device (Q0) in the feeder bay, if a control action to operate (Q0) is required, an interlock-check will be necessary. To control the device (Q0), the interlock-check must verify the status of several devices in the busbar and the bay.
Page 725 6F2S1915 (0.46) Circuit breaker (CB)† Q1, Q2, Q9: Disconnecting switch (DS) Q52, Q53, Q8, Q15, Q25: Earthing switch (ES) 63QBE: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “Off” state is shown at 270 bar or above.) 63QBF: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “On” state is shown at 255 bar or below.) 63GBE: GAS Pressure switch (e.g., “On”...
Page 726 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.7-2 Names of operators used in the Interlock-check formulae Sign of Example of Interlock interlock Description‡ interlock operator operator formula† If both input signals are “1”, the resultant AND(•) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 •...
Page 727 6F2S1915 (0.46) Nodes and formulae for interlock-check (ii) Figure 4.7-4 illustrates that an interlock-check is realized by using a number of nodes. For each node, the user is required to configure input signals, interlock-operators, and links between nodes. Following that, an interlock-check can be run. Node #1 Node #2 Node #7...
Page 728 6F2S1915 (0.46) Purpose of Quality information in the output signal (iii) In the output signal, the quality information will affect the control of the device. Table 4.7-3 shows four types of output signal. When the quality information (Quality) of an output signal issued by a node is indicated as being “NG”, it signifies that device control is forbidden.
Page 729 6F2S1915 (0.46) used for ‘Quality’ can be found immediately below Table 4.7-3. AND (• ) stVal Input(A) Quality stVal Output Quality stVal Input(B) Quality Figure 4.7-5 Logic of interlock operator (AND) and Input/Output signals OR interlock operator When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “OR”, the quality information is affected by device status (stVal).
Page 730 6F2S1915 (0.46) For example, when the interlock operator “OR” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it has to generate a signal (0–NG) using the equations (4.7-13) and (4.7-14). This is because the quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the OR operator; the OR operator produces one (1) which is defined as “NG”...
Page 731 6F2S1915 (0.46) COMP interlock operator When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “COMP”, the “COMP” operator outputs the original quality information intact. That is, the “COMP” interlock operator outputs quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table 4.7-7 shows two input-signals (A and B) and the output signal for the “COMP”...
Page 732 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.7-8 Signals generated in control functions Control Device status generated by the control “stVal” transposed in the node function function described on the left column 0(off) SPOS 1(on) 0x40(Open) 0† 0x40‡ 1§ DPOS 0x80(Close) 1† 0x80‡ 0§ “device status”...
Page 733 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.7.5 Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3100A11001 ILK_MID_UPDATING ILK condition number during counting 3101011DA0 SPOS01-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV01 3101011DA2 SPOS01-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV01 3101021DA0 SPOS02-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV02...
Page 734 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3102021DA0 DPSY2-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPSY DEV02 3102021DA2 DPSY2-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPSY DEV02 3103011DA0 DPOS01-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV01 3103011DA2 DPOS01-CLOSE...
Page 735 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3103161DA0 DPOS22-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV22 3103161DA2 DPOS22-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV22 3103171DA0 DPOS23-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV23 3103171DA2 DPOS23-CLOSE...
Page 736 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 31032C1DA0 DPOS44-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV44 31032C1DA2 DPOS44-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV44 31032D1DA0 DPOS45-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV45 31032D1DA2 DPOS45-CLOSE...
Page 737 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 3103421DA0 DPOS66-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV66 3103421DA2 DPOS66-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV66 3103431DA0 DPOS67-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV67 3103431DA2 DPOS67-CLOSE...
Page 738 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring point  ILK (Function ID: 570001) Element ID Name Description 31040B1DA0 TPOS11-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV11 31040B1DA2 TPOS11-P2 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P2 at TPOS DEV11 31040B1DA4 TPOS11-P3 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P3 at TPOS DEV11...
Page 739 6F2S1915 (0.46) Double position device function (DPOS) The double position device (DPOS) function is used when the user wishes to control a device having On and Off states, which is equivalent to controlling a device from the “Closed” or “Open” condition;...
Page 740 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.8.1 The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to DPOS01 operation. Table 4.8-10 shows all of the scheme switches in the DPOS function. Receiving “Select command On” from the remote-end Figure 4.8-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’...
Page 741 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Select logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command “Remote-On-Control” For SBO operation 512001_7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 742 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Off” from the remote-end (ii) Figure 4.8-3 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from the remote-end Failed...
Page 743 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command “Remote-Off-Control” For SBO operation 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command & with ILK† condition “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”...
Page 744 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command On” from the local-end (iii) Figure 4.8-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘On’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command On from the local-end...
Page 745 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) For SBO operation Select command Command “Local-On-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & To “Wait for a next For DIR operation command” To BO connection Operate command with ILK†...
Page 746 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Off” from the local-end (iv) Figure 4.8-7 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 747 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) For SBO operation Command “Local-Off-Control” Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition &...
Page 748 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command On” by PLC function Figure 4.8-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic Select command On from the local-end...
Page 749 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ & To “Wait for a next ON-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation (PLC #1 connection point) command” Operate command To BO connection 512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK†...
Page 750 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command Off” by PLC function (vi) Figure 4.8-11 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command Cancel logic Cancel command Select command On from the remote-end Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel logic...
Page 751 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) 1≥ & OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation (PLC#1 connection point) Operate command with To BO connection 512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK ILK† condition &...
Page 752 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select condition (vii) Figure 4.8-13 shows the select condition logic in the DPOS01 function. The DPOS01 function checks the condition for the Select command using the signal “DPOS1_3PH_STATE” (see Table 4.8-32). If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives are available: The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic, The user can add additional logic to the original logic.
Page 753 6F2S1915 (0.46) From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command blocking*1 CBK_STATE 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR To select logic Other devices traveling detected*3 Unmatched condition detected *5 Select condition Traveling OR Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP...
Page 754 6F2S1915 (0.46) is not identical to “IED test status”. Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section 4.8.6(i)-3) Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On and Off operations performed by the logic.
Page 755 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal name and number (viii) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicated that the signal is provided for optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 756 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.8-5 Mapping points for the reception of control commands Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) 512001 7003026D08 DEV02_CONTROL_REQ DPOS02 control command received. (Mapping Data) 512001 7003036D08 DEV03_CONTROL_REQ DPOS03 control command received. (Mapping Data) …...
Page 757 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description …. …. …. 512001 8203481F60 DPOS72_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS72) Table 4.8-9 PLC Monitoring points (On/Off output-signal for BIO) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (Off) command for Binary Output. 512001 8A03021DC4 DPOS02_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS02 select (Off) command for Binary Output.
Page 758 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.8.2 In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel conditions are satisfied, accordingly the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.) Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 759 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command” Command “Remote-cancel” “DPOS01_ CC_SS” Cancel command (512001_8603011E95) 510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ & Successes to cancel & Cancel condition† “Do nothing” “DPOS01_CC_FS” (512001_8703011E96) Operation Failed Figure 4.8-15 ‘Cancel’...
Page 760 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output To “Wait for a command” DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “DPOS01_ CC_SS” Cancel command (512001_8603011E95) Command “Local-cancel” & Successes of cancel “Do nothing” & Cancel condition “DPOS01_CC_FS” (512001_8703011E96) Operation Failed Figure 4.8-17 ‘Cancel’...
Page 761 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal name and number (iv) Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional use. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure using the signal; otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 762 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.8.3 Once the operation of the select logic is complete, the operate logic start to control the device. Receiving “Operate command On” from the remote-end Figure 4.8-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 763 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” (512001 8103011E82) Command “Remote-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 764 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when ‡‡...
Page 765 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7E) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” (512001 8003011E81) Command “Remote-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 766 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡...
Page 767 6F2S1915 (0.46) To BO connection Operate logic in DPOS01 Output Input “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” (512001 8103011E82) Operate Cmd. Command “Local-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] † with ILK condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 768 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡...
Page 769 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic in DPOS01 Output Input “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7E) DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” Operate Cmd. (512001 8003011E81) Command “Local-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW] † with ILK condition 1≥ & 1≥ & & 1≥ 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 770 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡...
Page 771 6F2S1915 (0.46) is true. Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” (512001 8003011E7F) DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-On-Control” requiring ILK† check (512001 8103011E82) (PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK † 1≥ & with ILK condition 1≥...
Page 772 6F2S1915 (0.46) to [DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed. Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals.
Page 773 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) “ “ DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-On-Control” with ILK† (512001 8003011E7E) (512001 8003011E81) (PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥...
Page 774 6F2S1915 (0.46) changed. Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table †† 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output signals. Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until ‡‡...
Page 775 6F2S1915 (0.46) From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) Command blocking*1 CBK_STATE 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR To selection logic Other devices traveling detected*3 Operate condition Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *5 Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6 = DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP...
Page 776 6F2S1915 (0.46) command is not identical to “IED test status”. Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section 4.8.6(i)-3) Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits. Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation- direction of logic.
Page 777 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 800302EE53 DPOS02IN_TMP_34 DPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#3) 512001 800303EE53 DPOS03IN_TMP_34 DPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#3) … … … 512001 800348EE53 DPOS72IN_TMP_34 DPOS72 user configurable condition(PLC#3) Table 4.8-17 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 and PLC#2 for additional and operate condition) Signal Number Signal Name...
Page 778 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 8003021E81 DPOS02_FEC_OK_CS DPOS02 Off-direction execute command 512001 8003031E81 DPOS03_FEC_OK_CS DPOS03 Off-direction execute command … …. …. 512001 8003481E81 DPOS72_FEC_OK_CS DPOS72 Off-direction execute command Table 4.8-20 PLC monitoring points (Output signals for response) Signal Number Signal Name Description...
Page 779 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation counter 4.8.4 The DPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation-counter to predict the lifespan of switchgear and other functions. The user can select a count mode using a setting. Table 4.8-22 and Figure 4.8-32 show the modes, for which a user is required to change a mode in response to a device signal.
Page 780 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote-end Mapping of Input signal required Figure 4.8-34 depicts the logic when a command “change value for counter” is received at the DPOS01 logic. With regard three-phase counter, input-point “DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point “DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ”...
Page 781 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate condition for the counter (iii) Figure 4.8-36 illustrates the operate condition logic. The DPOS01 function can determine an operate-condition using a signal received from “Control-hierarchy”. The control-hierarchy condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control- hierarchy with the DPOS01 function using connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”...
Page 782 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description … … … 512001 7003486D09 DEV72_3PH_REQ DPOS72 change command received. (Mapping Data) for 3-phase counter value 512001 7003016D0A DEV01_APH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for A-phase counter value 512001 7003026D0A DEV02_APH_REQ DPOS02 change command received. (Mapping Data) for A-phase counter value 512001 7003036D0A DEV03_APH_REQ DPOS03 change command received.
Page 783 6F2S1915 (0.46) Measurement of operation intervals 4.8.5 The DPOS01 function can measure operation intervals (OT1 to OT4) †; the intervals OT1 to OT2 can represent the period of time when a switch changes from “Closed” to “open”. In the DPOS01 function the operation period is grouped into sub-time periods, as shown in Table 4.8-26.
Page 784 6F2S1915 (0.46) The user can clear the intervals (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the “Operation time” User interface: sub-menu Figure 4.8-39 or operation from the remote-end. See chapter Monitoring sub-menu Operation Time DPOS1-OT1 10:48 1/26 10:48 DPSY1-OT > DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT1 CANCEL DPSY2-OT >...
Page 785 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setup for BIO module 4.8.6 The user should connect the DPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits; subsequently, the DPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. In order to set up the DPOS function the user should execute the following four steps. BI connection for status signal BO connection for “Select command On/Off”...
Page 786 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from the BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPOS01 condition logics “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” (512001 3103011001) Phase-A signals BI signal selected by setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 787 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals from the BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01 Output ‡ devices To select and operate DPOS01 condition logics “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” (512001 3103011001) Single phase signals BI signal selected by setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG] N/O contact Event & signal Suppression &...
Page 788 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 4.8-42 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of incoming signals.
Page 789 6F2S1915 (0.46) “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”. BO connection for “Operate command On/Off” (iii) Figure 4.8-44 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points “DPOS01_OEX_BO” and “DPOS01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate command On” and the “Operate command Off” signals are issued at BO3 and BO4 respectively.
Page 790 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting for “Select command On” For example, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of the command; the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function using the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]. Do not key the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” . Selecte logic in DPOS01 Contact health check...
Page 791 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting for “Operate command On” Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]. Operate logic in DPOS01 Contact health check “ ” DPOS01_OEX_BO logic in DPOS01 “510001_8201011DD3” & Result of contact health check BO3circuit at IO#1 “...
Page 792 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1) Figure 4.8-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 4.8-29, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Page 793 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2) Figure 4.8-50 shows a setting example of an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.8-30, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect.
Page 794 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3) Figure 4.8-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD];...
Page 795 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal name and number Table 4.8-32 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPOSxx) Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state 512001 3103021001 DPOS02_3PH_STATE DPOS02 3ph_state 512001 3103031001 DPOS03_3PH_STATE DPOS03 3ph_state …. ….
Page 796 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 4.8.7 The user can operate the DPOS function over IEC 61850 communications following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the DPOS function is designed for the class of “Double Point Controller (DPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 797 6F2S1915 (0.46) Defining SBO mode Figure 4.8-53 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as “CSWI4”. In the SBO mode, the user should select the following items for the “CSWI4$Pos” using GR-TIEMS: SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld ...
Page 798 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping output data (ii) The user should group the DPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. (Figure 4.8-55 illustrates how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the DPOS01 function are required to map for IEC 61850 communications.
Page 799 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.8-36 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI4 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper...
Page 800 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.8.8 DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Commo n DPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time DPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock DPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock DPOS01-EN Off / On...
Page 801 6F2S1915 (0.46) DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FixedLogic / DPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic FixedLogic / DPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail DPOS01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic factor...
Page 802 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.8.9 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01  DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Element ID Name Description 8003011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state 3103011FE5 DPOS01_APH_STATE DPOS01 aph_state 3103011FEA DPOS01_BPH_STATE DPOS01 bph_state 8603011F7B DPOS01_CNT_CS07 DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal 0003011D91 DPOS01_CNT_SEL DPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS...
Page 803 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in DPOS01  DPOS01(Function ID: 512001) Element ID Name Description 8003011E7D DPOS01_SLR_CS DPOS01 select release condition signal 8303011D02 DPOS01_ST_OFF DPOS01 Normal open state 8103011D03 DPOS01_ST_ON DPOS01 Normal close state 0003011D95 DPOS01_TMP_02 DPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS 3103011D80 DPOS01_TMP_06 DPOS01 control event data (selected)
Page 804 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1 device, but a 2 and other devices are also provided in the DPOS function. We have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve readability.
Page 805 6F2S1915 (0.46) Three position device function (TPOS) The three-position device function (TPOS) is used when it is required to control a device having a triple selector (e.g., the selector has three positions: P1, P2, or P3). The user can experience the following devices as the triple selector: A 43-switch (43S), an earth-switch (ES) with a disconnector (DS) and others.
Page 806 6F2S1915 (0.46) ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────── Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the IED ordering number;...
Page 807 6F2S1915 (0.46) Select logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.9.1 The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to TPOS01 operation. Table 4.9-11 shows all of the scheme switches in the TPOS function. Receiving “select command P1-control” from the remote-end Figure 4.9-2 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’...
Page 808 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) Command “P1-Control” from the remote For SBO operation 513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition To “Wait for a next command” For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 809 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “select command P2-control” from the remote-end (ii) Figure 4.9-4 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P2-control’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2 control from the remote-end Failed...
Page 810 6F2S1915 (0.46) 4.9-5,Table 4.9-7, and Table 4.9-10. §Note: An automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function Output signal to BO The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-5, can issue a “Select success”...
Page 811 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) Command “P3-Control” from the remote For SBO operation 513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command 1≥ & & with ILK† condition For DIR operation To BO connection Operate command &...
Page 812 6F2S1915 (0.46) Receiving “Select command P1-control” from the local-end. (iv) Figure 4.9-8 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ from the local-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2controlfromthe remote-end P3 control from the remote-end...
Page 813 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) For SBO operation Select command Command “Local-P1-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & To “Wait for a next For DIR operation command” To BO connection Operate command with ILK†...
Page 814 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2 control from the remote-end P3 control from the remote-end Cancel logic P1 control from the local-end P2control from the local-end Failed Keying “Select Select...
Page 815 6F2S1915 (0.46) it is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function ‡Note: A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more information, see Figure 4.9-20. Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.9-6, ††...
Page 816 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) For SBO operation Select command Command “Local-P3-Control” 1≥ with ILK† condition & & For DIR operation To BO connection Operat command with ILK† condition ILK† condition (“P3”) passed &...
Page 817 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2 control from the remote-end P3 control from the remote-end Cancel logic P1 control from the local-end P2 control from the local-end P3 control from the local-end Operate logic P1control by the PLC function...
Page 818 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) 1≥ & P1-control command requiring ILK† check To “Wait for a next For DIR operation (PLC connection point #1) command” Operate command To BO connection 513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK...
Page 819 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2 control from the remote-end P3 control from the remote-end Cancel logic P1 control from the local-end P2 control from the local-end P3 control from the local-end Operate logic P1 control by the PLC function...
Page 820 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) 1≥ & P2-control command requiring ILK †check For DIR operation (PLC connection point #1) Operate command To BO connection 513001 800401EE33 DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK with ILK†...
Page 821 6F2S1915 (0.46) Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a command P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic Cancel command P2 control from the remote-end P3 control from the remote-end Cancel logic P1 control from the local-end P2 control from the local-end P3 control from the local-end Operate logic P1 control by the PLC function...
Page 822 6F2S1915 (0.46) 510001 7001016D08 Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) 1≥ & P3-control command requiring with ILK† check For DIR operation (PLC connection point #1) Operate command To BO connection 513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK with ILK†...
Page 823 6F2S1915 (0.46) How to add another select condition signal If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal to the select condition logic using the PLC condition point “User Additional Condition”. Add a user-preferred signal using TPOS01IN_TMP_24, which is listed as PLC#1 in Table 4.9-8.
Page 824 6F2S1915 (0.46) Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator is changing the states of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR”...
Page 825 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal name and number (xi) Note: The user should note that the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for each table: “O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional usage. “M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user may face an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Page 826 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.9-5 Mapping points for the reception of control commands Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ TPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) 513001 7004026D08 DEV02_CONTROL_REQ TPOS02 control command received. (Mapping Data) 513001 7004036D08 DEV03_CONTROL_REQ TPOS02 control command received. (Mapping Data) …...
Page 827 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 820403ED50 TPOS03IN_TMP_21 TPOS03 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) … … …. 513001 820418ED50 TPOS24IN_TMP_21 TPOS24 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) Table 4.9-9 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic) Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
Page 828 6F2S1915 (0.46) Cancel logic for SBO mode 4.9.2 In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command can be possible when the cancel conditions are satisfied, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “wait for a command”). Receiving “Cancel”...
Page 829 6F2S1915 (0.46) The TPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring, point “TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal is true. Another “Operate failed” signal is issued at monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_FS” if the TPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel”...
Page 830 6F2S1915 (0.46) at the monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-Cancel” signal is true. Cancel condition logic (iii) Figure 4.9-25 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria “Unmatched condition detected” is connected normally for the cancel condition logic, set Fixedlogic for the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCNFFCT].
Page 831 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description … … … 513001 800418EE69 TPOS24IN_TMP_40 TPOS3 user configurable cancel condition Table 4.9-13 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition) Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 8604011E95 TPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in TPOS01 513001 8604021E95 TPOS02_CC_SS Cancel succeed in TPOS02...
Page 832 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes 4.9.3 After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to control the device. Receiving “Operate command for P1-control” from the remote-end Figure 4.9-26 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end. Wait for a command Select stage Wait for a next command...
Page 833 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81) Command “Remote-P1-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 834 6F2S1915 (0.46) [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued from logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2 “User-configurable condition”.
Page 835 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82) Command “Remote-P2-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 836 6F2S1915 (0.46) connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”. Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table †† 4.9-16 for PLC#2, Table 4.9-17 for PLC#3 and Table 4.9-20 for the outputs. Output signal to BO The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-29, can issue an “Operate”...
Page 837 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CS” (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83) Command “Remote-P3-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 838 6F2S1915 (0.46) logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate completed” signal, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01- LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Page 839 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81) Command Local-P1-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 840 6F2S1915 (0.46) §§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from the logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26.
Page 841 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82) Command Local-P2-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operate Cmd.
Page 842 6F2S1915 (0.46) this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01- LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”. Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table ††...
Page 843 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82) Command Local-P3-Control” [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ † 1≥ with ILK condition & 1≥ & 1≥ & 0.1 – 50.0 s Operation Cmd.
Page 844 6F2S1915 (0.46) logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01- LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Page 845 6F2S1915 (0.46) apply the signal at other connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_P1_COMMAND). We should assume the PLC#3 and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.9-2. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “...
Page 846 6F2S1915 (0.46) ‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected failing expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST] §§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal to be issued from the logic programmed by the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26, connect the “operate completed”...
Page 847 6F2S1915 (0.46) to be treated as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.9-3. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]. Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) Command “PLC-P2-Control” requiring ILK check “ “...
Page 848 6F2S1915 (0.46) LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic programmed by the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26, connect the “operate completed” signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User configurable condition”.
Page 849 6F2S1915 (0.46) switch [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]. Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) “ “ TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF” TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CS” Command “PLC-P3-Control”requiring ILK check (PLC#3 (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83) connection point) [TPOS01-CPW] Operate Cmd. 513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK † 1≥ & with ILK condition 1≥...
Page 850 6F2S1915 (0.46) §§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the programmed logic by the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26, connect the “operate completed”...
Page 851 6F2S1915 (0.46) TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001) Command blocking*1 CBK_STATE 1≥ 1≥ & & Double Command Blocking detected*2 DCB RCV OR To selection logic Other devices traveling detected*3 Operate condition Unmatched condition detected *5 Traveling OR Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Event suppression detected *6 = TPOS01_QLT_SPP ASEQ_MULTI_SEL...
Page 852 6F2S1915 (0.46) 4.9-6. Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a command is not identical to “IED test status”. Note: The Function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See 4.9.6(i)-3) Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits Note: The “Common control”...
Page 853 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 820402EE5E TPOS02IN_TMP_38 TPOS02 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) 513001 820403EE5E TPOS03IN_TMP_38 TPOS03 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) … … … 513001 820418EE5E TPOS24IN_TMP_38 TPOS24 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) Table 4.9-17 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#3 user configurable condition) Signal Number Signal Name...
Page 854 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description … … … 513001 8204181DD6 TPOS24_P3EX_BO Operate command (P3) for Binary Output in TPOS24 513001 8004011E7E TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command 513001 8004021E7E TPOS02_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS02 P1 direction execute command 513001 8004031E7E TPOS03_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS03 P1 direction execute command …...
Page 855 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value TPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (TPOS01–24) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec] TPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC TPOSxx-LGP1EXOT Logic selector for command output (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC TPOSxx-LGP2EXOT Logic selector for command output (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC TPOSxx-LGP3EXOT...
Page 856 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation counter 4.9.4 The TPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation counter to predict the lifespan of an EDS. The user can select a count mode in response to a device signal. Table 4.9-22 and Figure 4.9-45 show the mode, for which a user is required to change a mode in response to a device signal and the signal of the device such as the EDS.
Page 857 6F2S1915 (0.46) “TPOS_Dev1-P3”, respectively. The “TPOS_Dev1-All” represents the net counter of “TPOS01_ST_P1”, “TPOS01_ST_P2” and “TPOS01_ST_P3”. Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote-end Mapping of Input point required Figure 4.9-47 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is received at the TPOS01 function.
Page 858 6F2S1915 (0.46) Output signal to BO The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”. Operate condition for the counter (iii) Figure 4.9-49 illustrates the operate condition logic. The TPOS01 function can determine an operate-condition using a signal received from “Control hierarchy”. The Control hierarchy condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic;...
Page 859 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description … … … 513001 8A04181F8B TPOS24_SLD_CSCN TPOS24 counter selected Table 4.9-24 Mapping points Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for summation counter value 513001 7004026D09 DEV02_ALLCNT_REQ TPOS02 counter correction request for summation counter value 513001 7004036D09 DEV03_ALLCNT_REQ TPOS03 counter correction request for summation counter value...
Page 860 6F2S1915 (0.46) Measurement of operation Intervals 4.9.5 The TPOS01 function can measure operation intervals time†, the intervals OT1 and OT2 can represent the period of time when an earth-switch changes a position from another position. As shown in Table 4.9-27 the eight intervals are defined as switching as shown in Figure 4.9-50 Intermediate to Figure 4.9-53.
Page 861 6F2S1915 (0.46) Intermediate Signal “TPOS01_P3EX_BO” Intermediate Sensing intermediate state Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1” Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2” P3-control Signal “TPOS01_PT_P3” a. Switch motion (P2 to P3) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P2 to P3) Figure 4.9-53 Two intervals (OP7 and OP8) for P3 control Table 4.9-27 Eight intervals measured in TPOS01 function Intervals Trigger Events for measurement...
Page 862 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation Time TPOS1-OT 10:48 1/26 10:48 _TPOS1-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT1 CANCEL TPOS2-OT > ******.*** ms TPOS3-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT2 TPOS4-OT > ******.*** ms TPOS5-OT > ENTER TPOS_Dev1- OT3 TPOS6-OT > Figure 4.9-54 Operation time sub-menu Signal names and numbers Table 4.9-28 Mapping point for clearance of operation times Signal Number Signal Name...
Page 863 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setup for BIO module 4.9.6 The user should connect the TPOS input /output points with the BI and the BO circuits; subsequently, the TPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should execute the following four steps. BI connection for status signals BO connection for “select command”...
Page 864 6F2S1915 (0.46) “TPOS01_QLT_SPP”. The former one is used in the select condition logic and the operate condition (see Figure 4.9-20 and Figure 4.9-44). The latter is used for an event suppression detector. Decision by input signals The logic in Figure 4.9-55 can give a decision in response to the reception of the signals; the decision is of either “P1”, “P2”, “P3”, “Faulty”, and “Intermediate”.
Page 865 6F2S1915 (0.46) Event suppression detector If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the TPOS function will receive iterative signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the TPOS function; hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created. [TPOS-NELD] Signal from device...
Page 866 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminal and Selection logic in TPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire “ ” TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG (513001 8A04011DC4) “ ” Select Selection logic for select Signal captured by command 200B01_8002001112) ≥1 command P1 in TPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] DRIVER [Input signal 2] ≥1...
Page 867 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminal and Operate logic in TPOS01 BO4–BO6 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire “ ” TPOS01_P1EX_BO (513001_8104011DD0) “ ” Signal designated by Operate (200B01_8302031112) ≥1 Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] command P1-control DRIVER [Input signal 2] &...
Page 868 6F2S1915 (0.46) the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB “ with the contact health check function using the setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]. Do not key the point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO”. Likewise, BO2-RB and BO3-RB are required to be set. Contact health check Selection logic in TPOS01 logic in TPOS01 “...
Page 869 6F2S1915 (0.46) Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1) Figure 4.9-61 shows a setting example for 43S/EDS driving. Select and operate commands drive the BO1–BO6 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working correctly, the respective points of the BO (RBs) should be connected, as shown in Table 4.9-31, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Page 870 6F2S1915 (0.46) BIO module Remote/Local-end “ ” TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG Drivers (513001 8A04011DC4) P1-select “ ” BO1-RB command 200B01 8002001113) “ ” TPOS01_P1EX_BO (513001 8104011DD0) P1-operate “ ” command BO4-RB 200B01 8302031113) “ ” TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG (513001 8A04011DC6) P2-select “ ” BO2-RB command 200B01 8102011113) “...
Page 871 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.9-32 Erroneous setting example for contact health check Example #2 Health check setting for example #2 “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” on SLOT1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” on SLOT1 200B01 8102011113(BO2-RB) set for [TPOS01-P2SLBORD] “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”...
Page 872 6F2S1915 (0.46) example can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BO circuits available. Table 4.9-33 Extra setting example for contact health check Example #3 Setting for example #3...
Page 873 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 513001 8204021F59 TPOS02_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS02) 513001 8204031F59 TPOS03_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS03) … … … 513001 8204181F59 TPOS24_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS24) Table 4.9-35 PLC monitoring points (P1–P3 state signals in TPOSxx) Signal Number Signal Name Description...
Page 874 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 commination 4.9.7 The user can operate the TPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the TPOS function is designed for the class of “Integer Status Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed below: Step1: Editing Logical Node...
Page 875 6F2S1915 (0.46)  SBOw  Oper  Cancel  origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” ) †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down. Figure 4.9-65 LN editing screen for SBO (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 4.9-66 exemplifies the TPOS logic node saved as “GGIO2701”.
Page 876 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.9-38 Mapping signals for ISCSO object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory 513001 3104011008 TPOS01_ORCAT Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 513001 6A04011009 TPOS01_ORIDENT Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO stVal INT32 513001 3104011001 TPOS01_STATE Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO Quality 513001 3104011005 TPOS01_QUALITY Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO Timestamp 513001 9004011006 TPOS01_TIMESTAMP...
Page 877 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.9-39 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO2701 Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlVal INT32 Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper...
Page 878 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.9.8 TPOS01(FunctionID:513001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note Commo n TPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time TPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock TPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock TPOS01-EN Off / On - TPOS01 switch for Device01...
Page 879 6F2S1915 (0.46) TPOS01(FunctionID:513001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note FixedLogic / TPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail TPOS01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic factor FixedLogic / Change logic about P1 direction execute TPOS01-LGP1EXOT FixedLogic output...
Page 880 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.9.9 Signal monitoring points in TPOS01  TPOS(FunctionID:513001) Element ID Name Description 8004001FA3 TPOS00_CH_EC_LCD TPOS00 count change execute command by LCD 8004001D5E TPOS00_CH_EC_OWS TPOS00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI) 8004001D5F TPOS00_CH_EC_RCC TPOS00 count change execute command by RCC 8004001D60 TPOS00_CH_EC_RMT TPOS00 count change execute command by Remote...
Page 881 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in TPOS01  TPOS(FunctionID:513001) Element ID Name Description 8904011DC0 TPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG TPOS01 no direction select binary output signal 8604011F80 TPOS01_NSL_CS07 TPOS01 select receive signal check answer 3104011F93 TPOS01_OT1_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time1 reset signal 3104011D30 TPOS01_OT1_VAL TPOS01 operation time1 value 3104011F95 TPOS01_OT2_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time1 reset signal...
Page 882 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in TPOS01  TPOS(FunctionID:513001) Element ID Name Description 8604011F91 TPOS01_RST_CS07 TPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal 0004011F7B TPOS01_RST_SIG TPOS01 Reset time signal 8004011D54 TPOS01_SC_LCD TPOS01 select command by LCD 8004011D51 TPOS01_SC_OWS TPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI) 8004011D52 TPOS01_SC_RCC TPOS01 select command by RCC...
Page 883 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points in TPOS01  TPOS(FunctionID:513001) Element ID Name Description 8004011F8E TPOS01_TMP_75 TPOS01 reset time selected condition signal check 0004011F77 TPOS01_TRA TPOS01 travelling info 0004011F78 TPOS01_TRA_CTR TPOS01 travelling info for control 3104011D49 TPOS01_TRST_S TPOS01 operation time reset signal 8204011F41 TPOS01_UDF_DET1 TPOS01 Undefined Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
Page 884 6F2S1915 (0.46) Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device; hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For example, when the user wishes to find the “TPOS01_SC_OWS” point for the 2 device, use the description of “TPOS01_SC_OWS”...
Page 885 6F2S1915 (0.46) Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI) The general BI event detection (GENBI) function examines the signals generated on the binary input circuits (BIs); the GENBI function verifies the signals generated in terms of time, state, and quality. Accordingly, the GENBI function can elevate the value of the BI signals that are generated using external devices;...
Page 886 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation features 4.10.1 The operation process of the GENBI function is divided into an acquisition part and a suppression part. Signal acquisition process The acquisition process checks for the occurrence of state changes in each BI circuit. If a state change is detected, the acquisition process determines the direction of the state change and observes the time that the state change occurred.
Page 887 6F2S1915 (0.46) when the GENBI function determines that the signal is being generated repetitively. Signal from device Event No. 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 [GBI-TELD] [GBI-TELR] Event suppression Time....Figure 4.10-3 Example of signals and events suppressed by setting Figure 4.10-3 illustrates the case where a device produces repetitive signals.
Page 888 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.10-2 shows the event list screen. This event list is in response to the signals shown in Figure 4.10-3. Table 4.10-3 lists the common settings for event suppression. Table 4.10-4 shows the settings for a particular slot. Table 4.10-3 Common settings for event suppression Scheme switch Comment...
Page 889 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 4.10.2 Sending a report to the client is possible after the mapping is performed for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows, Step1: Editing Logical Node Step2: Mapping output data Editing Logical Node The user must make a logical node (LN) for the GENBI function.
Page 890 6F2S1915 (0.46) Drag and drop Figure 4.10-5 Quality signal being mapped into Ind1 object of GGIO101 GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 869 -...
Page 891 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.10.3 General BI (Function ID: 580001) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note GBI-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time GBI-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock GBI-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock IO#1 BI#1...
Page 892 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.10.4 Signal monitoring points in BI module at IO#1 slot  GENBI (Function ID: 580001) Element ID Name Description 0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI1 at IO#1 slot 0010011001 SLOT1 GBI02_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI2 at IO#1 slot 0010021001 SLOT1 GBI03_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI3 at IO#1 slot...
Page 893 6F2S1915 (0.46) ID. (i.e., “0”) Step 3 Choose a new circuit number. (i.e., pick the number “1” for the 2 circuit) Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth and sixth digits with the new device number. (i.e., get new ID “0010111001”...
Page 894 6F2S1915 (0.46) Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ) The function of the automatic sequence controller (ASEQ) is to control the PLC function that is used within the automatic sequence control function, which can be coded by the user. This control logic has software signals; the status of these software signals are changed by control commands that are sent from upstream devices.
Page 895 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function setup 4.11.1 Figure 4.11-1 outlines the command reception in the ASEQ01 function. The ASEQ01 function can generate a start command at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_START” (see Table 4.11-5), when the start command is provided for the ‘ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ’. Similarly, when a stop command is received in the ASEQ01 function, the stop command will be generated at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP”...
Page 896 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.11-3 Mapping points for Emergency command Signal Number Signal Name Description 523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOP_CONTROL_REQ Emergency control for stopping the operation Table 4.11-4 PLC connection points (Inputs for stopping ASEQ operation) Signal Number Signal Name Description 523001 800D01EDF2 ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET Instruction to stop ASEQ01 operation 523001 800D02EDF2...
Page 897 6F2S1915 (0.46) instruction is applied. Example of automatic sequence operation 4.11.3 Figure 4.11-2 exemplifies some sequence logic programmed using the PLC function; the logic is coded to operate two disconnector (DS1 and DS2) and a circuit breaker (CB). The logic can provide an instruction to close DS1 (i.e., device #2), close DS2 (i.e., device #3), and then close the CB (i.e., device #1) in a prescribed order.
Page 898 6F2S1915 (0.46) commences to operate the devices. Table 4.11-5 shows start commands. Note: If a stop command is applied to the ASEQ01 function, the operation of the control logic will be canceled promptly provided that the control logic is not operating the device.
Page 899 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operating state The operation state turns to OFF, when the control logic cancels the selection of Device#1 following the reception of a stop command from the ASEQ01 function. Selection signal for Device #2 Selection signal for Device #3 The control logic turns the selection signal to OFF when the control signal is not sent for the device.
Page 900 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal Number Signal Name Description 523001 810D0D1F50 EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP Command received for emergency stop 523001 310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST State signal about LCD screen 523001 310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST State signal about MIMIC screen 523001 800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD Select command generated on the LCD 523001 800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS Select command generated at OWS(HMI)
Page 901 6F2S1915 (0.46) Mapping for IEC61850 communication 4.11.6 The user can operate the ASEQ function using IEC 61850 communications after first completing the appropriate mapping using the GR-TIEMS software. Note that the ASEQ01 function is designed for the “Single Point Controller (SPC) class” described in the IEC 61850 communications standard.
Page 902 6F2S1915 (0.46) SBOw  Oper  Cancel  Origin  stSeld  sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)  ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )  †”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down Figure 4.11-6 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example) Defining DIR mode Figure 4.11-7exemplifies the settings in LN “GAPC1”...
Page 903 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.11-11 Mapping signals for SPCSO1 object Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orCat orCategory 523001 300D011008 ASEQ01_ORCAT Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 523001 6A0D011009 ASEQ01_ORIDENT Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN 523001 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 Quality 523001 310D011005 ASEQ01-QUALITY Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 Timestamp 523001 900D011006 ASEQ01_TIME...
Page 904 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 4.11-12 Mapping signals required for SPCSO1 object in ASEQ01 function Object_reference Attribute Type Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Timestamp Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Check Check Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN...
Page 905 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting 4.11.7 Auto Sequence(Function ID: 523001 ) Setting items Range Contents Default Unit Note ASEQ01-EN Off / On - ASEQ01 switch ASEQ02-EN Off / On - ASEQ02 switch ASEQ03-EN Off / On - ASEQ03 switch …. …. …. …..
Page 906 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal 4.11.8 Signal monitoring points in ASEQ01  ASEQ(Function ID: 523001) Element ID Name Description 000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Status flag to not be selected for multiple operations 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Reception state of the automatic sequence instruction command 000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD ASEQ01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS 310D011D00 ASEQ01_MMC_ST...
Page 907 6F2S1915 (0.46) device, but a 2 and other devices are also provided in the ASEQ function. We have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Page 908 6F2S1915 (0.46) Technical Description Contents Pages Pages Case structure and slot layout Type using compression terminals -Configuraiton swtich -1/1 size case -1/2 size case Date and time -3/4 size case -Time synchronization Type using ring terminals -DST(Summer time) -1/1 size case -Time zone -1/2 size case -3/4 size case...
Page 909 6F2S1915 (0.46) The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For instance, Figure 5-1shows the structure of the GR-series IED which is mounted in 3/4×19” rack. The user can find that the IED consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BI, BI, and BIO, and a power supply module (PWS), which can be mounted in an order from left to right.
Page 910 6F2S1915 (0.46) CP1M LAN I/F Filter Tele- CT×n communication system LAN I/F VT×m Auxiliary Binary output relay ×18 LCD/MIMIC Photo coupler Binary input ×18 LEDs Operation keys Auxiliary Binary output relay Monitoring jacks ×18 Function Key Photo coupler Binary input ×18 Local PC Power...
Page 911 6F2S1915 (0.46) IED case and module slot The IED case structure falls into two types: ‘Type using compression terminals’ and ‘Type using ring terminals’. The former is designed with ‘Compression plug type terminal block’ used at BIO and PWS modules. The latter is designed with ‘Ring type terminal block’. Figure 5.1-1 illustrates the difference of them.
Page 912 6F2S1915 (0.46) Type using compression terminals 5.1.1 1/1 size case Figure 5.1-2 shows diagrams of the 1/1 size case constructed with type using compression terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-2.a) Slots are provided for mounting modules.
Page 913 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side ●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E c. Schematic diagram Figure 5.1-2 Type using compression terminals (1/1 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 892 -...
Page 914 6F2S1915 (0.46) 3/4 size case (ii) Figure 5.1-3 shows diagrams of the 3/4 size case constructed with type using type using compression terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal blocks is placed at the far left side, which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T7”.
Page 915 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side c. Schematic figure Figure 5.1-3 Type using compression terminals (3/4 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 894 -...
Page 916 6F2S1915 (0.46) 1/2 size case (iii) Figure 5.1-4 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case constructed with type using compression terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal blocks is placed at the far left side, which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T4”.
Page 917 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side c. Schematic diagram Figure 5.1-4 Type using compression terminals (1/2 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 896 -...
Page 918 6F2S1915 (0.46) Type using ring terminals 5.1.2 1/1 size case Figure 5.1-2 shows diagrams of the 1/1 size case constructed with type using ring terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
Page 919 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side ●FG ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E c. Schematic diagram Figure 5.1-5 Type using ring terminals (1/1 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 898 -...
Page 920 6F2S1915 (0.46) 3/4 size case (ii) Figure 5.1-3 shows diagrams of the 3/4size case constructed with type using ring terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side, which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T5”.
Page 921 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side c. Schematic figure Figure 5.1-6 Type using ring terminals (3/4 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 900 -...
Page 922 6F2S1915 (0.46) 1/2 size case (iii) Figure 5.1-4 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case with type using ring terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side, which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
Page 923 6F2S1915 (0.46) a. View from front side b. View from rear side c. Schematic diagram Figure 5.1-7 Type using ring terminals (1/2 size case) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 902 -...
Page 924 6F2S1915 (0.46) Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT) The transformer module (VCT) of the IED is used to acquire the power system quantities. A safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT module is removed from the IED case.
Page 925 6F2S1915 (0.46) VCT12B 5.2.1 VCT12B is for a single circuit breaker arrangement (1CB), as shown in Figure 5.2-3. When the VCT12B is used in 1.5CB arrangement, the user should have the Paralleling connected CTs (i.e., summation) at VCT12B. VCT12B Three-phase voltages Terminal AC analog Input...
Page 926 6F2S1915 (0.46) Constitution of VCT 5.2.2 Figure 5.2-4 shows VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram (termed ‘VC1’); the same terminal screw numbers are shown on both the left and the right figures. The user should note that the last screw No. 30 and FG terminal are connected with a short-bar by default.
Page 927 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting VCT ratio 5.2.3 As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user shall set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal. Setting a ratio for the VT When the VT quantity applied at the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary voltage to the secondary voltage should be set.
Page 928 6F2S1915 (0.46) Sifting VCT rated current 5.2.4 In accordance with the ordering code, a rated current (either 1 or 5A) has been set previously in the manufacture. If the user wishes to alter to other rated current, the user can do it by using jumpers†...
Page 929 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201) Default setting Range value Setting item Contents Notes rating rating rating rating AI1_Ch1_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#1 alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Rating DEP / (1A) / (5A) – Rated current at CH#2 references AI1_Ch3_Rating...
Page 930 6F2S1915 (0.46) Terminal Input Type of Jumper analog Screw input signal input position Number channel LCD screen I/O setting sub-menu Voltage AI#1 Voltage 10:48 Voltage AI1_Ch6_Ratio Voltage 2000 AI1_Ch6_Rating e Voltage Current Current Current Current VCT circuit board Rear Front –...
Page 931 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings for residual voltage, CT polarity, and busbar arrangements 5.2.5 In the IED, the residual voltage represented ‘Ve’ is given by the computation with three-phase voltages (V a , V b , and V c ), but the VCT is ready to obtain it exclusively using APPL-VCT settings when the residual voltage transformer is connected with the VCT.
Page 932 6F2S1915 (0.46) Busbar CB#1 VTs on busbar Relay application CB#2 VTs on feeder Three-phase voltages V L1 V L2 V L3 Computation Zero sequence phase voltage (3V0) Reference voltage Reference voltage V s2 /V e Feeder#1 Feeder#2 Busbar Figure 5.2-9 Computation of residual voltage Setting [APPL-Ves2] = Off (iii) If no voltage is applied at the Vs2/Ve terminal, the user can set Off for the setting [APPL-...
Page 933 6F2S1915 (0.46) Busbar Busbar Setting [Pol-1CT] = Positive Setting [Pol-1CT] = Positive 1CT-Ie 1CT-Ie Setting [Pol-1CT-Ie] = Positive Setting [Pol-1CT-Ie] = Positive Line1 Line2 I em I em CT-Iem CT-Iem Setting [Pol-CT-Iem] = Positive Setting [Pol-CT-Iem] = Positive Busbar Figure 5.2-11 Positive polarity settings in 1/1.5 CB arrangement For example in 1.5CB arrangement, the user should have Paralleling connected CTs (i.e., summation).
Page 934 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal processing and communication module (CPU) A signal-processing and communication module (CPU) are made up of a main circuit board for processing (CP1M) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to COM#5). These circuit boards are designed for LAN, time synchronization and others. They are mounted on the CPU main board by their connectors.
Page 935 6F2S1915 (0.46) Configuration switch 5.3.2 The CPU module has a jumper to change configuration mode (Jumper W6). Figure 5.3-3 shows the location. For default mode (normal), Pins 1-2 and 3-4 are open (i.e., default configuration has been set by the manufacture in accordance with the order code). When the user wishes to alter the other mode particularly, close either Pin 1-2 or Pin 3-4 using a jumper (Optional EP- 221).
Page 936 6F2S1915 (0.46) Communication modules 5.3.3 The tables below show piggyback-circuit-modules provided for the communication. They are mounted on CPU module directly. The actual mountings depend on the user ordering; thus, Appendixes Ordering the user should locate the actual implementations by the ordering using Typical external connection Table 5.3-1 Communication modules for Network Module...
Page 937 6F2S1915 (0.46) 100Base-FX module (SC plug) A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN communication. Dual slots space (i.e., labeled with “C11” and “C12”) is occupied when a single (Port A) module is mounted (see Figure 5.3-5; i.e., space “C12” is not blank). Therefore, the total number for communication ports needs to be cared.
Page 938 6F2S1915 (0.46) Sheath A cable for PCB connector an IED COM-A(+) Sheath COM-B(−) A cable for another Bottom COMM(GND) a. View from connector edge Frame ground (FG) b. Port circuit Figure 5.3-7 RS485 connection and module Fiber optic module Fiber optic module is used for the serial communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. Figure 5.3-8 Fiber optic module IRIG-B000 module IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock;...
Page 939 6F2S1915 (0.46) number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of time Technical Description: Clock function synchronization, see Chapter PCB connector (Disuse) (Disuse) Bottom a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit Figure 5.3-9 IRIG-B000 module GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 940 6F2S1915 (0.46) Location of communication modules 5.3.4 As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the Appendix: Typical external reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See connection Figure 5.3-10 exemplifies IED has a LAN module (1000BASE-FX) at C11.
Page 941 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 5.3-11 illustrates a structure, which has 100BASE-FX, RS385, and IRIG-B000 modules. VCT SLOT Com. SLOT 100BASE-FX 100BASE 100BASE-FX RS485 100BASE Blank • • • COM-A • • • COM-B • • • COMM Blank IRIG-B000 Practical communication modules Schematic diagram Figure 5.3-11 Modules structure (’9D code’...
Page 942 6F2S1915 (0.46) Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED.
Page 943 6F2S1915 (0.46) Binary input feature 5.4.1 Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent, but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 5.4-2. Table 5.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module Module Input features Example...
Page 944 6F2S1915 (0.46) Binary input circuit 5.4.2 The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable logic for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with settings.
Page 945 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A module) Setting devices Range Contents Default BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI9...
Page 946 6F2S1915 (0.46) From 8001001111 8001001110 For Relay & and External devices On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions Filter BI1-NC & ≥1 BI1-CPL & 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s ≥1 & & Normal [INVERSE-SW] [BI1-CPL] Inverse 8101011110 8101011111 On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172 BI2-NC...
Page 947 6F2S1915 (0.46) †Note: The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen. User interface: Monitoring-sub menu Chapter discusses how to see the state of the binary input circuits. ‡Note: Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by the function ID “200B001”.
Page 948 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting threshold level For Standard type (the BI1A module and others) The voltage level "High or Low", which tells a threshold of pick up / drop off, is selectable using the selection switch [THRES_Lvl]. Table 5.4-5 shows the threshold voltage of picking-up/dropping-off for binary inputs at the high and low level.
Page 949 6F2S1915 (0.46) As the threshold voltage is expressed with Table 5.4-5, the user should set High or Low to match to the voltage value to input to binary inputs. Table 5.4-6 shows the recommended settings. This matter means that the user should also set a threshold voltage at the power supply unit Chapter: Technical description: Power supply to determine the degree of the power failure (see module...
Page 950 6F2S1915 (0.46) For Variable type (exclusive for the BI2A) The BI2A module has a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP], and [BI10-12_PICKUP];...
Page 951 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.4-7 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type Guaranteed levels Typical levels Setting values [V] Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V] 17.9 10.5 14.2 18.5 11.1 14.8 19.9 12.3 16.1 20.5 12.9 16.7 22 to 29 21.8 14.0...
Page 952 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input voltage Operating area Guaranteed pick up level Intermediate area Typical pick up level Guaranteed drop off level Non-operating area Figure 5.4-2 Operating area in the variable type Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the applied voltages.
Page 953 6F2S1915 (0.46) CPL switch (iii) If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit.
Page 954 6F2S1915 (0.46) IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3 Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out) Setting targets: BI1–BI18 and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7 and Common. c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3) a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1) Figure 5.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3 The setting table of section 5.4.6 is available for all binary IO modules except for the BI2A module;...
Page 955 6F2S1915 (0.46) Binary output feature 5.4.3 A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types of BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below: (1) Fast operating (2) Semi-fast operating (3) Hybrid...
Page 956 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.4-8 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied sign module -Normally open (N/O) Fast BIO3A Terminal screw number -Dry contact operating -Closure is the fastest amongst all of the BO types. Type -Make &...
Page 957 6F2S1915 (0.46) Binary output circuit 5.4.4 Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 5.4-9 shows the settings summary of CPL function. Table 5.4-9 Setting items for binary output circuits Setting-range or Setting items Contents Default Data_ID...
Page 958 6F2S1915 (0.46) Figure 5.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on the BO1A module in order to help understand the settings. The BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has timers and switches. The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below: CPL switch Selection of input signals...
Page 959 6F2S1915 (0.46) signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that a BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and the function ID†...
Page 960 6F2S1915 (0.46) Logic level inversion The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW]. Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing. Logic timer switch (vi) In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a scheme...
Page 961 6F2S1915 (0.46) How to set the settings for binary output circuits (vii) BIO1A BO1A IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3 Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out) Setting targets: BO1–BO10 Setting targets: BO1–BO18 c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3) b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2) Figure 5.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3 Figure 5.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs).
Page 962 6F2S1915 (0.46) IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for the BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section 5.4.8(ii). PLC and the binary output circuits (viii) The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly.
Page 963 6F2S1915 (0.46) BI1A BI2A BI3A (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) BI10 BI11 (−) (−) BI12 BI13 (−) (−) BI14 BI15 (−) BI16 BI17 (−) (−) BI18 BI19 BI10 (−) (−) BI20 BI21 BI11 (−) BI22 BI23 BI12 (−) (−) BI24...
Page 964 6F2S1915 (0.46) BO1A BO2A BO1(SF) BO1(H) (−) BO2(SF) BO2(H) (−) BO3(SF) BO3(H) (−) BO4(SF) BO4(H) (−) BO5(SF) BO5(H) (−) BO6(SF) BO6(H) (−) BO7(H) (−) BO8(H) (−) BO9(H) (−) BO10 BO10(H) (−) BO11 BO11(H) (−) BO12 BO12(H) (−) BO13 BO13(H) (−) BO14 BO14(H) (−)
Page 965 6F2S1915 (0.46) BIO3A BIO1A BIO2A (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) BO1(SF) (−) (−) BO2(SF) (−) BO1(F) BO3(SF) BI10 (−) BO2(F) BO4(SF) BI11 (−) BO3(F) BO5(SF) BI12 (−)
Page 966 6F2S1915 (0.46) Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “ ” is substituted for the actual slot location number. BIO3A (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) BO1(F) BO2(F) BO3(F) BO4(F) BO5(F) BO6(F) Ring type terminal Terminal screw numbers are denoted with the same one.
Page 967 6F2S1915 (0.46) Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal BI2A BI2A BI2A (−) (−) FG cable BI2A (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) (−) Short wire BI10 BI10 (−) (−) BI11 BI11 (−) (−)
Page 968 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings of binary input circuits 5.4.6 Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) For the standard type being furnished Unit Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes value Common THRES_Lvl Low / High Determination of input threshold CMP_NUM 4 - 9 Number of times filtered...
Page 969 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: (ii) 200B02 to 200B0n) For the standard type being furnished Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1) For the variable type being furnished Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2) GRZ200 (Soft 031 &...
Page 970 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits 5.4.7 Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) Before the filer Signal monitoring points (before the filter)  Element ID Name Description 8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter 8101011111 BI2-NC BI2 signal without filter 8201021111 BI3-NC BI3 signal without filter...
Page 971 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points (after the filer)  Element ID Name Description 8501051110 BI6 signal with filter 8601061110 BI7 signal with filter 8701071110 BI8 signal with filter 8801081110 BI9 signal with filter 8901091110 BI10 BI10 signal with filter 8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter 8B010B1110...
Page 972 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)  Element ID Name Description 8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic 8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic 8001101172 BI17-CPL BI17 signal with filter and programmable logic 8101111172 BI18-CPL BI18 signal with filter and programmable logic...
Page 973 6F2S1915 (0.46) Settings of binary output circuits 5.4.8 Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01) Default setting Setting item Range Contents Notes value BO1_CPL Off / On Programmable binary output enable Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned Input signal2 ditto...
Page 974 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID (ii) 200B02 to 200B0n) Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i)) GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032) - 953 -...
Page 975 6F2S1915 (0.46) Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits 5.4.9 Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) Before the contact-driver Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)  Element ID Name Description 8002001112 BO1 signal 8102011112 BO2 signal 8202021112 BO3 signal 8302031112 BO4 signal 8402041112...
Page 976 6F2S1915 (0.46) Connection points for the PLC Connection point in PLC logic  Element ID Name Description 310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic 310201E11D BO2-SOURCE BO2 output command by PLC-logic 310202E11D BO3-SOURCE BO3 output command by PLC-logic 310203E11D BO4-SOURCE BO4 output command by PLC-logic 310204E11D BO5-SOURCE...
Page 977 6F2S1915 (0.46) Power supply module (PWS) PWS structure 5.5.1 The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. There are two types for the PWS module about the DC rated voltage. The first type is for “110- 250 Vdc”...
Page 978 6F2S1915 (0.46) Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is 2(B) 2(A) substituted for actual slot location number. substituted for actual slot location number. Ring plug type terminal block FAIL1 FAIL1 FAIL2 FAIL2 Positive(+) Positive(+) Negative(−) Negative(−)
Page 979 6F2S1915 (0.46) Input and output items of PWS 5.5.2 Table 5.5-2—Table 5.5-4 show the input and output items of PWS. < Input items> Table 5.5-2 Input items of PWS Terminal Items Remarks screw No. Positive (+) 29 or 30 DC voltage Used to operate the IED Negative (-) 31 or 32...
Page 980 6F2S1915 (0.46) DC voltage monitoring 5.5.3 Threshold voltage for detection/non-detection of power error DC voltage is monitored, and a power supply failure can be outputted from the PWS for the Chapter Automatic supervision function. The user should set its failure level for the PWS. See Automatic supervision function for more information.
Page 981 6F2S1915 (0.46) Recommended setting for the voltage level (ii) As the threshold voltage is expressed with Table 5.5-5, the user should set High or Low to match to the voltage value to input to PWS. Table 5.5-6 shows the recommended setting. After that, the user should set the threshold voltage about the picking-up/dropping-off of the Technical description: Binary IO module (BI, BO and BIO) binary input (see Chapter:...
Page 982 6F2S1915 (0.46) Human Machine Interface (HMI) Outlook 5.6.1 Figure 5.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel. The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large LCD ‘MIMIC’), LED indicators (#1– #26), operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle. The LCD can display information;...
Page 983 6F2S1915 (0.46) LED Indicators 5.6.2 The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26) are provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC function can control to indicate the statuses.
Page 984 6F2S1915 (0.46) LED-03 3100031001 [On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3 & ≥ [Input signal 1] DRIVER & [Logic Timer] ≥1 & [Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & [Input signal 3] & ≥1 [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000 Inverse & Delay [Input signal 8] Dwell...
Page 985 6F2S1915 (0.46) Logic timer switch The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch [TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type: Instant type When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Page 986 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01)) Default setting Setting items Range Contents Units value LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW LED#3 color selection Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned) Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID)
Page 987 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01) Element ID Name Description 3100021001 ERROR Error LED 3100011001 IN SERV In service LED 3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3 3100041001 LED-04 Output signal of the LED indicator #4 3100051001 LED-05 Output signal of the LED indicator #5...
Page 988 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function keys with LEDs 5.6.3 The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation; the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 5.6-3). However, the user can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally, the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user presses the function key.
Page 989 6F2S1915 (0.46) Function key logic for F1 Terminal and BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) (Function ID: 240001) wire “ ” Signal designated by Setting Data ID “F1 200B01_8002001112) ≥1 setting [Input signal 1] Signal to the SIGNAL” for the device “FUNC-KEY1”...
Page 990 6F2S1915 (0.46) 31001B1001 [On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic & ≥ LED-F1 [Input signal 1] DRIVER & [Logic Timer] ≥1 & [Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & [Input signal 3] & ≥1 [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000 Inverse & Delay [Input signal 8] Dwell...
Page 991 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001) Default setting Setting items Range Contents Units value Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned) Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) Set a Data ID at the second input on F1.
Page 992 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001) Element ID Name Description 3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC] 3100011737 F2 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F2 referring the setting [LOGIC] 3100021737 F3 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F3 referring the setting [LOGIC]...
Page 993 6F2S1915 (0.46) Monitoring jacks 5.6.4 A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated.
Page 994 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301) Unit Default setting Setting items Range Contents value Term A (Preferred Data ID) Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned) Term B (Preferred Data ID) Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned) Term C (Preferred Data ID)
Page 995 6F2S1915 (0.46) Operation keys 5.6.5 L/R key The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 5.6-12 shows the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Page 996 6F2S1915 (0.46) Clock function Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the UTC is selected;...
Page 997 6F2S1915 (0.46) Time Synchronization 5.7.3 The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting [Time_Sync_Src]:  SNTP method  IRIG-B method  Binary Input (BI) method Synchronization using SNTP Example of SNTP synchronization...
Page 998 6F2S1915 (0.46) Synchronization using IRIG-B (ii) Example of IRIG-B synchronization The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided. The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†. IRIG-B000† Clock 10:00 Signal [Time] 2012-11-21 10:00:05 IRIG-B signal [Format] generator Unit...
Page 999 6F2S1915 (0.46) Table 5.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization Setting Setting item Range Contents Notes example TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time...
Page 1000 6F2S1915 (0.46) Setting procedure The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs. Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC]. Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-8. Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID].

This manual is also suitable for:

Grz200

Toshiba GR200 Series Instruction Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Toshiba GR200 Series

Summary of Contents for Toshiba GR200 Series

Page 100: Figure

Page 103: Figure

Page 105: Figure

Page 144: Figure

Page 146: Figure

Page 147: Figure

This manual is also suitable for: